Wrangler (2009) - Car JEEP - Free user manual and instructions

Product Type	SUV / Off-road Vehicle
Model Year	2009
Manufacturer	Jeep (Chrysler Group)
Body Style	4-door SUV or 2-door convertible
Engine Options	3.8 L V6 (gasoline)
Transmission	4-speed automatic or 6-speed manual
Drivetrain	Rear-wheel drive or 4-wheel drive (part-time)
Horsepower	202 hp @ 5,200 rpm
Torque	237 lb-ft @ 4,000 rpm
Length	173.4 in (4,404 mm)
Width	70.4 in (1,788 mm)
Height	71.0 in (1,803 mm)
Wheelbase	107.0 in (2,718 mm)
Curb Weight	Approximately 3,800 - 4,100 lbs (1,724 - 1,860 kg)
Fuel Type	Regular unleaded gasoline
Fuel Tank Capacity	18.0 gallons (68.1 liters)
Seating Capacity	4 passengers (2-door) or 5 passengers (4-door)
Main Features	Removable roof, fold-down windshield, off-road suspension, tow hooks, skid plates
Safety Features	Airbags, ABS, electronic stability program, traction control
Maintenance	Oil change every 8,000 km, tire rotation every 10,000 km, cabin air filter replacement
Spare Parts Availability	OEM parts available from Mopar and aftermarket suppliers
Manual Language	English
Manual Pages	502

Frequently Asked Questions - Wrangler (2009) JEEP

What engine does the 2009 Jeep Wrangler have?

The 2009 Jeep Wrangler is equipped with a 3.8-liter V6 gasoline engine producing 202 horsepower and 237 lb-ft of torque.

Is the 2009 Jeep Wrangler available with four-wheel drive?

Yes, the Wrangler offers part-time four-wheel drive with a two-speed transfer case for off-road capability.

What transmission options are available?

The 2009 Wrangler comes with either a 4-speed automatic or a 6-speed manual transmission.

How do I change the oil in my 2009 Jeep Wrangler?

Refer to the owner's manual for the recommended oil viscosity (typically 5W-20) and capacity (5 quarts). The oil change interval is every 8,000 km or 5,000 miles.

What is the towing capacity of the 2009 Wrangler?

With the proper equipment, the 2009 Wrangler can tow up to 2,000 lbs (907 kg) for 2-door models and 3,500 lbs (1,588 kg) for 4-door Unlimited models.

How do I remove the soft top on my Wrangler?

To remove the soft top, unlatch the front header, unzip the side and rear windows, and fold the top down. Detailed instructions are in the owner's manual.

What is the fuel tank capacity?

The fuel tank holds 18.0 gallons (68.1 liters) of regular unleaded gasoline.

Where can I find replacement parts?

OEM parts are available from Mopar dealers. Aftermarket parts are widely available from automotive retailers and online stores.

Does the 2009 Wrangler have airbags?

Yes, it includes front airbags for driver and passenger. Side curtain airbags are optional or standard on later models.

How do I properly inflate the tires?

Recommended tire pressure is 35 psi (2.4 bar) for both front and rear tires. Check the driver's door jamb sticker for exact specifications.

USER MANUAL Wrangler (2009) JEEP

WRANGLER 2009 owner's manual

VEHICLESOLDINCANADA

WithrespecttoanyVehiclesSoldinCanada,thename ChryslerLLCshallbedeemedtobedeletedandthe nameChryslerCanadaInc.usedinsubstitutiontherefor.

DRIVINGANDALCOHOL

Drunkendrivingisoneofthemostfrequentcausesof accidents.

Yourdrivingabilitycanbeseriouslyimpairedwithblood alcohollevelsfarbelowthelegalminimum.Ifyouare drinking,don'tdrive.Ridewithadesignatednon-drinking driver,callacab,afriend,orusepublictransportation.

WARNING!

Drivingafterdrinkingcanleadtoanaccident.Your perceptionsarelesssharp,yourreflexesareslower, andyourjudgmentisimpairedwhenyouhavebeen drinking.Neverdrinkandthendrive.

Thismanualillustratesanddescribestheoperationof featuresandequipmentthatareeitherstandardorop-tionalonthisvehicle. Thismanualmayalsoincludea descriptionoffeaturesandequipmentthatarenolonger availableorwerenotorderedonthisvehicle.Please disregardanyfeaturesandequipmentdescribedinthis manualthatarenotonthisvehicle.

ChryslerLLCreservestherighttomakechangesin designandspecifications, and /ormakeadditionstoor improvementstoitsproductswithoutimposingany obligationuponitselftoinstallthemonproductspreviouslymanufactured.

Jeep is a registered trademark of Chrysler LLC

Copyright©2008ChryslerLLC

SECTIONPAGE

TABLEOFCONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION 3 1
2 THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE 9 2
3 UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE 773
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 1954
5 STARTINGANDOPERATING 2735
6 WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES 3876
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3997
8 MAINTENANCESCHEDULES 4518
9 IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE 4719
10 INDEX 48110

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

■Introduction.... 4 ■Warnings And Cautions.... 8
■Rollover Warning.... 5 ■Vehicle Identification Number.... 8
■How To Use This Manual....6 ■Vehicle Modifications/Alterations....8

4INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.

This is a specialized utility vehicle designed for both on-road and off-road use. It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional two-wheel drive enclosed vehicles were not intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle.

Thetwo-wheeldriveutilityvehiclewasdesignedfor on-roaduseonly.Itisnotintendedforoff-roaddriving oruseinothersevereconditionssuitedforafour-wheel drivevehicle.

Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner's Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road or working the vehicle, don't overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive.

As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident. Refer to "On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips" in Section 5 of this manual.

This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

NOTE: After you read them manual, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold, so that thenew owner will be aware of falls safety warnings.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts, and cares about your satisfaction.

ROLLOVERWARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not.

6INTRODUCTION

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.

819128e1

RolloverWarningLabel

Failuretousethedriverandpassengerseatbelts

provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

HOWTOUSETHISMANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's equipment

The detailed index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.

Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner's Manual:

8INTRODUCTION

WARNINGSANDCAUTIONS

This Owner's Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.

VEHICLEIDENTIFICATIONNUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment.

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.

VEHICLEMODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Anymodificationsoralterationstothisvehiclecould seriouslyaffectitsroadworthinessandsafetyand mayleadtoanaccidentresultinginseriousinjuryor death.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

CONTENTS

■A Word About Your Keys....12

□Ignition Key Removal....12

□Key-In-Ignition Reminder.... 13

■Steering Wheel Lock.... 1 3

□To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel ..... 1 4

□To Release The Steering Wheel Lock.... 1 4

■Sentry Key®. 14

□Replacement Keys....15

□Customer Key Programming.... 16

□ General Information 17

■ Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ..... 17

□Rearming The System.... 18

□To Set The Alarm 18

□To Disarm The System 18

■Illuminated Entry 19

■Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped 19

□To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate ..... 2 0

□Programming Additional Transmitters ..... 2 2

□General Information 22

□Transmitter Battery Replacement.... 2 3

■Remote Starting System — If Equipped ..... 2 4

□How To Use Remote Start.... 24

■Doors.... 26

☐Upper Half Door Window Removal — If Equipped.... 2 6

☐Upper Half Door Window Installation — If Equipped.... 27

□Front Door Removal 27

□Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) ..... 2 9

■Door Locks.... 30

□Manual Door Locks 30

□ Power Door Locks — If Equipped ..... 32

□Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit.... 3 3

□Automatic Door Locks 34

■Windows.... 35

□ Power Windows — If Equipped ..... 35

□Rear Power Windows (Four-Door Models Only) 36

□Wind Buffeting 37

■Rear Swing Gate 37

■Occupant Restraints 38

□Lap/Shoulder Belts 39

☐Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout (Four-Door Models Only) ..... 4 4

□Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 45

□Seat Belt Pretensioners....46

□Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert®) 46

□Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . 4 8

□Seat Belt Extender 48

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE11

□Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ..... 4 8

□Child Restraint 61

■Engine Break-In Recommendations....73

■Safety Tips 74

□Transporting Passengers....74

□Exhaust Gas 74

□Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle.... 7 5

☐Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle 76

The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic bag with the key code number on it. If you received your keys without the bag, ask your authorized dealer to give you the number. The key code can also be obtained by your authorized dealer from your vehicle invoice.

IgnitionKeyRemoval

AutomaticTransmission—IfEquipped

1. Place the shift lever in the PARK position.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (ACCESSORY) position.

IgnitionSwitchPositions

1 — LOCK 3 — ON
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) 4 — START

1. Push the ignition key inward.
2. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE 13

ManualTransmission—IfEquipped

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (ACCESSORY) position.
2. Push the ignition key inward.
3. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position, and remove the key.

WARNING!

Leavingunattendedchildreninavehicleisdanger- ousforanumberofreasons.Achildorotherscould beinjured.Childrenshouldbewarnednottotouch theparkingbrake,brakepedal,ortheshiftlever.Do notleavethekeyintheignition.Achildcould operatepowerwindows,othercontrols,ormovethe vehicle.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves. Always removethe key from the ignition, and lock alldoors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Key-In-IgnitionReminder

Opening the driver's door when the key is in the ignition, sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.

STEERINGWHEELLOCK

Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle without the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved approximately a half turn in either direction, and the key is not in the ignition, the steering wheel will lock.

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

ToManuallyLocktheSteeringWheel

With the engine running, rotate the steering wheel one-half revolution from the straight ahead position, turn off the engine, and remove the key. Rotate the steering wheel slightly in both directions until the lock engages.

ToReleasetheSteeringWheelLock

Insert the key in the ignition, and turn the wheel slightly to the left or right, to disengage the lock.

NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.

SENTRYKEY®

The Sentry Key ^® Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.

The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine.

NOTE:A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.

During normal operation, after turning on the ignition switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that

someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer.

NOTE:The Sentry Key®Immobilizer System is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection.

All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

ReplacementKeys

NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a Sentry Key ^® is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

CAUTION!

Alwaysremove the Sentry Keys ^® from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.

At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN). Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

procedure. This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one that has never been programmed.

NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer.

CustomerKeyProgramming

If you have two valid Sentry Keys ^® , you can program new Sentry Keys ^® to the system by performing the following procedure:

1. Cut the additional Sentry Key®Transponder blank(s) to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.

2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key.

3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key.

4. Insert a blank Sentry Key® into the ignition switch. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing. To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off.

The new Sentry Key® is programmed. The Remote KeylessEntry(RKE) transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.

Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key ^® , contact your authorized dealer for details.

NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the system's memory. This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.

GeneralInformation

The Sentry Key ^® system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
- This device must accept any interference that may be received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

VEHICLESECURITYALARM—IFEQUIPPED

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors, swing gate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visible signals when activated. The horn will sound, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three minutes. If disturbance is still present (driver's door, passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes.

NOTE: The Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm are quite different. Please take a moment to activate the Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm to hear the differences in the horn. In case one should go off in the future, you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.

If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself.

ToSettheAlarm

The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to lock the doors and swing gate, or when you use the power door lock switch while the door is open. After all the doors are locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light (located on the instrument cluster) will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During this 16 second arming period, opening any door or the swing gate will cancel the arming. If the Vehicle Security Alarm successfully arms, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the Vehicle Security Alarm is set.

ToDisarmtheSystem

To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm, you will need to press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter, or turn the ignition key to the ON position. If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence, the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly. If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter, once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed (after 16 seconds), when you pull the door handle to exit, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. You may also accidentally disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver's door with the key and then locking it. The door will be locked but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm.

ILLUMINATEDENTRY

The interior lights will come on when you open any door.

The lights will remain on after all of the doors are closed, and then fade to off or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned on.

REMOTEKEYLESSENTRY(RKE)—IF EQUIPPED

This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors, swing gate, and activate the Panic Alarm from a maximum distance of 66 ft (20 m) using a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE19

ThreeButtonRKETransmitter

1 — Lock
2 — Unlock

NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects.

20THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

ToUnlocktheDoorsandSwingGate

Press and release the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button once to unlock the driver's door only, or twice to unlock all the doors and swing gate. When the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed, the Illuminated Entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash twice.

The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first RKE transmitter UNLOCK button press, using the following procedure:

1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter.

2. Continue to hold the RKE transmitter LOCK button for at least four seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds, then press and hold the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.

3. Release both buttons at the same time.

4. Test this feature while outside of the vehicle, by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.

NOTE: Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while you are inside of the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.

1. If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature, repeat the above steps.

ToLocktheDoorsandSwingGate

Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal. If desired, the "Sound Horn On Lock" feature can be turned on or off using the following steps:

1. Press the RKE transmitter LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.
2. While the LOCK button is pressed (after four seconds), press the RKE transmitter PANIC button. Release both buttons.

The "Sound Horn On Lock" feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.

UsingThePanicAlarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE21

the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on.

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time, or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.

NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system.

ToTurnOff"FlashLightsWithLock"

NOTE: The "Flash Lights With Lock" feature can be turned on or off using the following steps:

1. Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds.

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

1. While the UNLOCK button is pressed, (after four seconds) press the RKE transmitter LOCK button. Release both buttons.
2. Test the "Flash Lights With Lock" feature outside of the vehicle, by pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button with the ignition in the LOCK position, and the key removed.

NOTE: Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.

The "Flash Lights With Lock" feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.

ProgrammingAdditionalTransmitters

Refer to Sentry Key®"Customer Key Programming."

If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact your authorized dealer for details.

GeneralInformation

This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance, check for these two conditions:

1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life of battery is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile or CB radios.

TransmitterBatteryReplacement

The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.

NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply; See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw, remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a flat blade (screwdriver) to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Use extreme care not to damage the seal or internal components.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE23

81182c72

SeparatingRKETransmitterHalves

1. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
2. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two halves together.

24 THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

NOTE: If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw, reinstall and tighten the screw until snug.

REMOTESTARTINGSYSTEM—IFEQUIPPED

This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of nately 328 ft (100 m).

NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.

HowtoUseRemoteStart

All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start:

• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed

• Hood closed

• Hazard switch off

• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
  • RKE PANIC button not pressed

WARNING!

• Donotstartorrunanengineinaclosedgarageor confinedarea.ExhaustgascontainsCarbonMonoxide(CO)whichisodorlessandcolorless.Carbonmonoxideispoisonousandcancauseserious injuryordeathwheninhaled.
• KeepRemoteKeylessEntry(RKE)transmitters awayfromchildren.OperationoftheRemoteStart System,windows,doorlocksorothercontrols couldcauseseriousinjuryordeath.

ToEnterRemoteStart

Press and release the REMOTE START button on the RKE transmitter twice, within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.

NOTE:

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE25

Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:

• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
- Any engine warning lamps come on
- The hood is opened
• The hazard switch is pressed
• The transmission is moved out of PARK
• The brake pedal is pressed

ToExitRemoteStartModewithoutDrivingthe Vehicle

Press and release the REMOTE START button one time, or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request.

Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position.

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle.

DOORS

CAUTION!

Carelesshandlingandstorageoftheremovabledoor panelsmaydamagetheseals,causingwatertoleak intothevehiclesinterior.

UpperHalfDoorWindowRemoval—IfEquipped

1. Grasp the half door window and pull upward.

UpperHalfDoorWindow

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE27

UpperHalfDoorWindowInstallation—IfEquipped

1. Grasp the half door window and line up pins into pockets in lower door.
2. Push down to ensure the half door window is fully seated.

FrontDoorRemoval

WARNING!

Donotdriveyourvehicleonpublicroadswiththe doorsremovedasyouwilllosetheprotectionthat theycanprovide.Thisprocedureisfurnishedforuse duringoff-roadoperationonly.

1. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx®head driver).

1. Unplug the wiring harness connector under the instrument panel by pressing the tab at the side of the connector and pulling to disconnect.

NOTE: If the red latch on the connector is locked, push the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch on one end (right) of the connector. This will unlock the connector tab, allowing the tab to be pressed down and enabling the harness to be disconnected.

1 — Harness Connector

2 — Body Hook

3 — Door/Harness Strap

1. Unhook the door strap from the body hook. Be careful not to allow the door to swing fully open as the mirror may damage paint.

2. With the door open, lift the door to clear hinge pins from their hinges, and remove door.

To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the opposite order.

RearDoorRemoval(Four-DoorModels)

WARNING!

Donotdriveyourvehicleonpublicroadswiththe doorsremovedasyouwilllosetheprotectionthat theycanprovide.Thisprocedureisfurnishedforuse duringoff-roadoperationonly.

1. Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges (using a #T50 Torx®head driver).

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE29

1. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
2. Remove the trim access door from the bottom of B-pillar.

1. Unplug the wiring harness connector.

NOTE: If the red latch on the connector is locked, push the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch on one end (right) of the connector. This will unlock the connector tab, allowing the tab to be pressed down and enabling the harness to be disconnected.

1. Unhook the door strap from the body hook.

2. With the door open, lift the door to clear hinge pins from their hinges, and remove door.

To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous steps in the opposite order.

DOORLOCKS

ManualDoorLocks

The front (two-door models) and rear doors (four-door models) are equipped with a rocker-type interior door lock. To lock the door when leaving your vehicle, press the LOCK position and close the door.

ManualDoorLock
NOTE: The ignition key that is used to start the vehicle is used to lock or unlock the doors, swing gate, and console storage.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE31

WARNING!

• Forpersonalsecurityreasonsandsafetyinan accident,lockthevehicledoorswhenyoudrive,as wellaswhenyouparkandleavethevehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle.Leaving unattendedchildreninavehicleisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Donotleavethekeyin theignition.Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows,othercontrols,ormovethevehicle.

The door lock switch is located on each front door panel. Press the switch downward to lock the doors, and upward to unlock the doors.

PowerDoorLockSwitch

WARNING!

• Forpersonalsecurityreasonsandsafetyinan accident,lockthevehicledoorswhenyoudrive,as wellaswhenyouparkandleavethevehicle.
• Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle.Leaving unattendedchildreninavehicleisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Donotleavethekeyin theignition.Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows,othercontrols,ormovethevehicle.

AutomaticUnlockDoorsOnExit

The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if:

1. The "Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit" feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission shift lever is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE33

AutomaticUnlockDoorsonExitProgramming

The "Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit" feature can be enabled or disabled as follows:

1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position.
3. Depress the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

NOTE: Use the "Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit" feature in accordance with local laws.

The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met:

1. The "Automatic Door Locks" feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h).
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

AutomaticDoorLocksProgramming

The "Automatic Door Locks" feature can be enabled or disabled as follows:

1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position.
3. Depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting.

NOTE: Use the "Automatic Door Locks" feature in accordance with local laws.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE35

WINDOWS

PowerWindows—IfEquipped

The power window switches are located on the instrument panel center stack (below the radio). The top left switch controls the left front window and the top right switch controls the right front window. The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger window (four-door models), and the lower right switch controls the right rear passenger window (four-door models). The switches will continue to function for up to two minutes after the ignition key has been removed, or until a front door is opened.

PowerWindowSwitches

WindowLockoutSwitch(Four-DoorModelsOnly)

The window lockout switch (located between the window switches) allows you to disable the rear window switches that are located on the back of the center floor console. To disable the window controls, press the window lockout button downward. To enable the window controls, press the window lockout button upward.

Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an "Auto-Down" feature. Press the window switch past the first detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch.

To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.

To open the window part way, press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop.

The power window switches remain active for two minutes after the ignition has been turned off. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.

RearPowerWindows(Four-DoorModelsOnly)

The rear passenger window switches are located on the back of the center floor console.

RearPowerWindowSwitches(Four-DoorModels)

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE37

WindBuffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting window opening.

REARSWINGGATE

The swing gate can be unlocked by using the key, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors.

To open the swing gate, press the button on the gate handle.

GateHandle
NOTE: Close the rear flip-up window before attempting to close the swing gate (hard top models only).

Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, Advanced Front Airbags for both the driver and front passenger, and side airbags (if equipped) for both the driver and front passenger. If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized belts, your seat belts can also be used to hold infant and child restraint systems.

NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on collision severity.

Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible.

WARNING!

Inacollision, you and your passengers can suffer injuries, including fatalities, if you are not properly buckled up. You can strik the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always besure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly.

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and that they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE39

inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times to reduce or prevent injuries.

Lap/ShoulderBelts

All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.

WARNING!

- Itisextremelydangeroustorideinacargoarea, insideoroutsideofavehicle.Inacollision,people ridingintheseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.

(Continued)

• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatusing aseatbeltproperly.
• Wearingaseatbeltincorrectlyisdangerous.Seat beltsaredesignedtogoaroundthelargebonesof yourbody.Thesearethestrongestpartsofyour bodyandtaketheforcesofacollisionthebest. Wearingyourbeltinthewrongplacecouldmake yourinjuriesinacollisionmuchworse.Youmight sufferinternalinjuries,oryoucouldevenslideout ofpartofthebelt.Followtheseinstructionsto wearyourseatbeltsafelyandtokeepyourpassengerssafe,too.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Twopeopleshouldneverbebeltedintoasingle seatbelt.Peoplebeltedtogethercancrashintoone anotherinanaccident,hurtingoneanotherbadly. Neverusealap/shoulderbeltoralapbeltformore thanoneperson,nomatterwhattheirsize.

Lap/ShoulderBeltOperatingInstructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.

(Continued)

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE41

PullingOuttheLap/ShoulderBeltLatchPlateInsertingLatchPlateintoBuckle

1. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a "click."

• Abeltthatisbuckledintothewrongbucklewill notprotectyouproperly. Thelapportioncould ridetohighonyourbody, possiblycausing internalinjuries. Alwaysbuckleyourbeltintothe bucklenearestyou.
• Abelthatisloosewillnotprotectyouaswell.In asuddenstopyoucouldmovetoofarforward, increasingthepossibilityofinjury.Wearyourseat beltsnugly.
• Abeltthatiswornunderyourarmisverydangerous.Yourbodycouldstriketheinsidesurfacesof thevehicleinacollision,increasingheadandneck injury.Abeltwornunderthearmcancause internalinjuries.Ribsaren'tasstrongasshoulder bones.Wearthebeltoveryourshouldersothatthe strongestboneswilltaketheforceinacollision.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Ashoulderbeltplacedbehindwillnotprotectyou frominjuryduringacollision.Youaremorelikely tohityourheadinacollisionifyoudonotwear yourshoulderbelt.Thelapandshoulderbeltare meanttobeusedtogether.

• Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.

(Continued)

NOTE: The Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the driver's seat belt is buckled.

RemovingSlackfromBelt

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE43

WARNING!

- Alapbeltworntoohighcanincreasetheriskof internalinjuryinacollision.Thebeltforceswon't beatthestronghipandpelvicbones,butacross yourabdomen.Alwayswearthelapbeltaslowas possibleandkeepitsnug.

- Atwistedbeltcannotdoitsjobaswell.Ina collision,itcouldevencutintoyou.Besurethe beltisstraight.Ifyoucannotstraightenabeltin yourvehicle,takeittoyourauthorizeddealerand haveitfixed.

1. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.

1. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle. The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.

WARNING!

Afrayedortornbeltcouldripapartinacollisionand leaveyouwithnoprotection.Inspectthebeltsystem periodically,checkingforcuts,frays,orlooseparts. Damagedpartsmustbereplacedimmediately.Do notdisassembleormodifythesystem.Seatbelt assembliesmustbereplacedafteracollisionifthey havebeendamaged(i.e.,bentretractor,tornwebbing,etc.).

RearCenterLap/ShoulderBeltRetractorLockout (Four-DoorModelsOnly)

This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever the 60% rear seatback is not fully latched. This prevents someone from wearing the rear center lap/shoulder belt when the rear seatback is not fully latched.

NOTE:

• If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannot be pulled out, check that the rear seatback is fully latched.
• If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear center lap/shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out, the Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be activated. To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor.

WARNING!

Therearcenterlap/shoulderbeltisequippedwitha lock-outfeaturetoensurethattherearseatbackisin thefullyuprightandlockedpositionwhenoccupied. Iftherearseatbackisnotfullyuprightandlocked andtherearcenterlap/shoulderbeltcanbepulled outoftheretractor,thevehicleshouldimmediately betakentoyourauthorizeddealerforservice.Failure tofollowthiswarningcouldresultinseriousorfatal injury.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE45

AdjustableUpperShoulderBeltAnchorage

In the front seat positions, the shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck. Push in on the anchorage near your outside shoulder and slide it up or down to reach the position that serves you best.

AdjustingUpperShoulderBelt

WARNING!

Positiontheshoulderbeltheightadjusterssothatthe beltrestsacrossthemiddleofyourshoulder.Failure toadjustthesafetybeltproperlycouldreducethe effectivenessoftheseatbeltandincreasetheriskof injuryinacollision.

As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer a higher position. When you release the anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position.

SeatBeltPretensioners

The driver and front passenger seat belts are equipped with a pretensioning device that is designed to remove any slack from the seat belt systems in the event of a collision. This device improves the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the

occupant early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt must still be worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) Module. Like the airbags, the pretensioners are a single use item. After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, they must be replaced.

EnhancedSeatBeltUseReminderSystem (BeltAlert®)

If the driver's seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5mph (8 km/h), the BeltAlert® will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.

Once the warning is triggered, the BeltAlert® will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver's seat belt is buckled. The BeltAlert® will be reactivated if the driver's seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).

BeltAlert ^® can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps:

NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position. Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert®.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, and buckle the driver's seat belt.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE47

1. Turn the ignition key to the ACC/ON position (do not start the engine), and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off.
2. Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver's seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending with the seat belt buckled.
3. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming.

BeltAlert ^® can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.

NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver's seat belt remains unfastened.

We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe.

Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision.

SeatBeltExtender

If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.

WARNING!

Usingaseatbeltextenderwhennotneededcan increasetheriskofinjuryinacollision.Onlyuse whentheseatbeltisnotlongenoughwhenitisworn lowandsnug,andintherecommendedseating positions.Removeandstowtheseatbeltextender whennotneeded.

SupplementalRestraintSystems(SRS)

This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver's front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel. The front passenger airbag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The letters SRS are embossed on the airbag covers.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE49

NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags.

The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision.

1 — Driver Airbag
2 — Passenger Airbag
3 — Knee Bolster

If the vehicle is equipped with side airbags, they are located inside the driver and front passenger seats, and their covers are also labeled SRS.

SideAirbagLocation

NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim; but they will open during airbag deployment.

WARNING!

- Donotputanythingonoraroundthefrontairbag coversorattempttomanuallyopenthem.Youmay damagetheairbagsandyoucouldbeinjured becausetheairbagsmaynolongerbefunctional. Theseprotectivecoversfortheairbagcushionsare designedtoopenonlywhentheairbagsareinflating.

- Ifyourvehicleisequippedwithsideairbags,do notuseaccessoryseatcoversorplaceobjects betweenyouandthesideairbags;theperformance couldbeadverselyaffectedand/orobjectscould bepushedintoyou,causingseriousinjury.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• If your vehicle is equipped with side air bags, donot attach cup holders or any other object son or around the door. The in flatingside air bag could drivethe objects into occupants, causing serious injury.
• Donotcoverorplaceitemsontheairbagcovers. Theseitemsmaycauseseriousinjuryduringinflation.
• Donotstoreorplaceitemsunderthefrontseats. Youmaydamagetheairbagwiringharnesses.

The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on severity and type of collision. Along with the seat belts, Advanced Front Airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

51

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag:

1. Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat.

Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.

Children that are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat, in a child restraint or belt-positioning booster seat. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.

52 THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint. (Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section.)

You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.

1. All occupants should ALWAYS use their lap and shoulder belts properly.
2. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate.
3. Do not lean against the door. If your vehicle has side airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door.
4. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the

Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided under "If You Need Assistance" in Section 9 of this manual.

WARNING!

• Relyingontheairbagsalonecouldleadtomore severeinjuriesinacollision.Theairbagswork withyourseatbelttorestrainyouproperly.In somecollisions,theairbagswon'tdeployatall. Alwayswearyourseatbeltseventhoughyouhave airbags.
• Beingtooclosetothesteeringwheelorinstrument panelduringairbagdeploymentcouldcauseseriousinjury,includingdeath.Airbagsneedroomto inflate.Sitback,comfortablyextendingyourarms toreachthesteeringwheelorinstrumentpanel.
• Ifthevehiclehassideairbags,theyalsoneedroom toinflate.Donotleanagainstthedoor.Situpright inthecenteroftheseat.

The airbag system consists of the following:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Airbag Warning Light
- Driver Front Airbag
- Front Passenger Airbag
- Front Seat-Mounted Side Airbags (If Equipped)
• Steering Wheel and Column
- Instrument Panel
- Knee Impact Bolsters
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
- Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner

HowtheAirbagSystemWorks

Occupant Restraint Control (ORC) Module

The ORCis part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle.

The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or side airbags is required in a frontal or side collision. Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, side airbags, and front seat belt, as required, depending on each type of impact.

Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.

The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration.

The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision.

Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all crashes, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating airbag.

The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. If the key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

- Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Light for six to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition is first turned on. After the self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will

turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup.

WARNING!

IgnoringtheAirbagWarningLightinyourinstrumentpanelcouldmeanyouwon'thavetheairbagsto protectyouinacollision.Ifthelightdoesnotcome on,staysonafteryoustartthevehicle,orifitcomes onasyoudrive,havetheairbagsystemchecked immediately.

- The DriverandPassengerAirbag/InflatorUnitsare located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag inflation rates are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE55

size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.

- The SideImpact(SRS)Seat-MountedSideAirbags (IfEquipped)are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.

The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision.

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions. These include all of the items previously mentioned.

based on the severity and type of collision, the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The side airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds. The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force, that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates. This especially applies to children.

- The KneeImpactBolstershelp protect the knees of the driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag.

IfaDeploymentOccurs

The airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any or all of the following may occur:

- The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven't healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE57

• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer's instructions for cleaning.
• Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployedairbagsandseatbeltpretensionerscannot protectyouinanothercollision.Havetheairbags, seatbeltpretensioner,andseatbeltretractorassemblyreplacedbyanauthorizeddealerassoonas possible.

EnhancedAccidentResponseSystem

In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System to perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed.
• Unlock the doors automatically.
  MaintainingYourAirbagSystem

WARNING!

- Modificationstoanypartoftheairbagsystem couldcauseittofailwhenyouneedit.Youcould beinjurediftheairbagsystemisnotthereto protectyou.Donotmodifythecomponentsor wiring,includingaddinganykindofbadgesor stickerstothesteeringwheelhubtrimcoverorthe upperrightsideoftheinstrumentpanel.Donot modifythefrontbumperorvehiclebodystructure.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Youneedproperkneeimpactprotectionina collision.Donotmountorlocateanyaftermarket equipmentonorbehindthekneebolsters.
• Itisdangeroustotrytorepairanypartofthe airbagsystemyourself.Besuretotellanyonewho worksonyourvehiclethatithasanairbagsystem.

AirbagWarningLight

You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate for your protection in an impact. The airbag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system promptly:

• Does not come on during the six to eight seconds after the ignition switch is first turned on.
• Remains on after the six to eight second interval.
• Comes on for any period of time while driving.

EventDataRecorder(EDR)

In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see the following list) in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration data during and/or after airbag deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.

NOTE:

1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE59

In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC, such investigations may be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those associated with universities, and with hospital and insurance organizations.

In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity

60THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTING YOUR VEHICLE

upon request. General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler LLC to any third party except when:

1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database, provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.

Data parameters that may be recorded:

• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for electronically-controlled safety systems, including the airbag system
  • Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
• "Time" of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage)
  • Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
• Impact velocity and angle
• Seat belt status
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
  • Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
  • Engine control status (including engine speed)
  • Transmission gear selection
• Cruise control status

• Traction/stability control status
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System status

ChildRestraint

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years and under should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats, rather than in the front.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat owner's manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your child.

WARNING!

Inacollision, an unrestrained child, even atiny baby, can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could no hold the child, no matter how strongly you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicles should be in proper restraint for the child's size.

InfantsandChildRestraints

- Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least one-year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and “convertible” child seats.

62THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 lbs (9 kg). “Convertible” child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System in this section.)
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVERbe used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position.

WARNING!

• Improperinstallationcanleadtofailureofan infantorchildrestraint.Itcouldcomelooseina collision.Thechildcouldbebadlyinjuredorkilled.Followthemanufacturer'sdirectionsexactlywheninstallinganinfantorchildrestraint.
• Arearward-facinginfantrestraintshouldonlybe usedinarearseat.Arearward-facinginfantrestraintinthefrontseatmaybestruckbyadeployingpassengerairbagwhichmaycausesevereor fatalinjurytotheinfant.

Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint:

• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. The manufacturer also recommends that you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child's weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may not work when you need it.
• The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE63

seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to "Automatic Locking Mode" in this section.

• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out.
• If the belt still cannot be tightened, or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint secure, try a different seating position.

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer's instructions tell you.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.

OlderChildrenandChildRestraints

Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg), and who are older than one year. These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system (Refer to LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System in this section).

The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit the vehicle's seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle's seat cushion while the child's back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.

ChildrenTooLargeforBoosterSeats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.

• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
- The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible.

• Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind the back.

NOTE: For additional information, referto www.seatcheck.orgorcall1-866-SEATCHECK.Canadianresidents, should referto Transport Canada's website for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm

InstallingtheChildRestraintSystem

We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage, and a

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE

65

means for adjusting the tension of the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap having a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage, and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap.

In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages. The tether strap should be routed under the center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of the seatback. Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat.

Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here. Again, carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system.

NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH-compatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.

WARNING!

Anincorrectlyanchoredtetherstrapcouldleadto increasedheadmotionandpossibleinjurytothe child.Useonlytheanchorpositiondirectlybehind thechildseattosecureachildrestrainttoptether strap.

LATCH—ChildSeatAnchorageSystem(Lower AnchorsandTetherforChildren)

Your vehicle's rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle's seat belts, instead securing

the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle's seat belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages, have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.

NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children. It is recommended that before installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with, and never leave an unattended child in the vehicle.

All three rear seating positions of the four door model have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible, webbing-mounted lower attachments. The two door model can accommodate flexible LATCH-compatible

child seats in the two outboard seating positions only. The two door model does not have a center seating position. Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only in both the two door and four door models. Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment, NEVER install LATCH-compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage.

If you are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle's seat belt for the outboard position, but you must use the vehicle's seat belt at the center position. If your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle's seat belts. Please refer to "Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt" in this section for typical installation instructions.

We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system.

The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars, located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback, and are visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces.

LatchAnchorage(Two-DoorModels)

LatchAnchorage(Four-DoorModels)

In addition, there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat.

TetherStrapMounting(Two-DoorModels)

70THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTING YOUR VEHICLE

TetherStrapMounting(Four-DoorModels)

Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap having

a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage, and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap.

You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars, pushing aside the seat cover material. Then, locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.

WARNING!

Improperinstallationofachildrestrainttothe LATCHanchoragescanleadtofailureofaninfantor childrestraint.Thechildcouldbebadlyinjuredor killed.Followthemanufacturer'sdirectionsexactly wheninstallinganinfantorchildrestraint.

InstallingChildRestraintsUsingtheVehicleSeat Belt

In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out.

If the belt still can't be tightened, or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still can't make the child restraint secure, try a different seating position.

To attach a child restraint tether strap:

TetherStrapMounting(Two-DoorModels)

TetherStrapMounting(Four-DoorModels)

Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat. For the outboard seating positions, route the tether under the head rest, and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.

WARNING!

Anincorrectlyanchoredtetherstrapcouldleadto increasedheadmotionandpossibleinjurytothe child.Useonlytheanchorpositionsdirectlybehind thechildseattosecureachildrestrainttoptether strap.

TransportingPets

Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE 73

ENGINEBREAK-INRECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in “Engine Oil”, under “Maintenance Procedures” in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.

A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.

SAFETYTIPS

TransportingPassengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA.

WARNING!

- Itisextremelydangeroustorideinacargoarea, insideoroutsideofavehicle.Inacollision,people ridingintheseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

ExhaustGas

WARNING!

Exhaustgasescaninjureorkill. They contain carbon monoxide(CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing(CO) follow the safety tips:

Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area.

If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.

If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is

THINGSTOKNOWBEFORESTARTINGYOURVEHICLE75

damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

SafetyChecksYouShouldMakeInsidethe Vehicle

SeatBelts

Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition, replace the belt.

The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

PeriodicSafetyChecksYouShouldMakeOutside the Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects

lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.

DoorLatches

Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.

FluidLeaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and corrected immediately.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CONTENTS

■Mirrors 81

□Inside Day/Night Mirror 81

□Outside Mirrors 82

■uconnect®phone 82

■Seats 83

□Front Seat Adjustment....83

□Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped 84

□Front Seatback Recline 85

□Front Easy Entry Seats — Two Door Models.... 8 5

□Head Restraints 87

□Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two Door Models.... 8 8

□Removing The Rear Seat — Two Door Models.... 8 9

□Replacing The Rear Seat — Two Door Models.... 9 1

□60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door Models 91

78 UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

□To Raise The Rear Seat....92

■To Open And Close The Hood ..... 9 3

■Lights 94

□Multifunction Lever....94

□Parking Lights, Instrument Panel Lights And Headlights.... 95

□Lights-On Reminder 95

□Headlight Dimmer Switch....96

□Flash-To-Pass 96

□Front Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 9 6

□Turn Signals 96

□Lane Change Assist....96

□Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . . 9 7

□Interior Lights 97

■Windshield Wipers And Washers....98

□Windshield Wiper Operation 98

□Intermittent Wiper System.... 100

□Windshield Washers 101

□Mist Feature....101

■ Tilt Steering Column 101

■ Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped ..... 102

□To Activate....103

□ To Set a Desired Speed 104

□ To Deactivate 104

□ To Resume Speed 104

□ To Vary The Speed Setting ..... 104

□Manual Transmission.... 105

□To Accelerate For Passing.... 105

■Electrical Power Outlet.... 106

■Cupholders.... 108

□Front Cupholders.... 108

□Rear Cupholders.... 109

■Storage 109

□Console Storage Compartment....109

□Rear Storage Compartment....110

■Dual Top — If Equipped ..... 1 1 0

□Removing The Soft Top....1 1 1

□Installing The Soft Top....1 1 2

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE79

■Freedom Top Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — If Equipped.... 1 1 5

□Front Panel(s) Removal.... 1 1 6

□Front Panel(s) Installation.... 1 1 8

□Front Panel(s) Installation Only (With Rear Hard Top Removed) ..... 118

□Rear Hard Top Removal.... 1 1 9

□Rear Hard Top Installation....122

■Door Frame 122

□Door Frame Removal — Two-Door Models 123

□Door Frame Installation — Two-Door Models 125

80 UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

□Door Frame Removal — Four-Door Models.... 1 2 6
□Door Frame Installation — Four-Door Models.... 1 2 9

■Soft Top — Two Door Models ..... 1 3 1

□Folding Down The Soft Top 134
□Putting Up The Soft Top 143

■Soft Top (Four-Door Models) ..... 1 5 3

□Folding Down The Soft Top 157
□Putting Up The Soft Top 167

■Sunrider®(Two-Door Models) — If Equipped.... 179

□Opening The Sunrider®. 180

□Closing The Sunrider®. 182

■Sunrider®(Four-Door Models) — If Equipped 183
■Folding Windshield 186

□Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bars.... 188
□Raising The Windshield And Replacing Side Bars.... 191

■Rear Window Features — Hard Top Only . . . . 1 9 2

☐Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped 192
□Rear Window Defroster — If Equipped ..... 193

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE81

MIRRORS

InsideDay/NightMirror

A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield).

AdjustingRearviewMirror

82UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

OutsideMirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

OutsideRearviewMirror

WARNING!

Vehiclesandotherobjectsseeninthepassenger-side convexmirrorwilllooksmallerandfartheraway thantheyreallyare.Relyingtoomuchonyour passenger-sidemirrorcouldcauseyoutocollidewith anothervehicleorotherobject.Useyourinside mirrorwhenjudgingthesizeordistanceofvehicle seeninthepassenger-sidemirror.

uconnect® phone

This feature is not available on two-door or four-door models.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE83

SEATS

FrontSeatAdjustment

Move the seat forward or rearward by lifting the lever. Be sure the latch is fully engaged.

Voice Recognition Button (uconnect® phone)

When you press this button, a "Not Equipped with uconnect®" message will display on your radio screen.

Phone Button (uconnect® phone)

When you press this button, a "Not Equipped with uconnect®" message will display on your radio screen.

ManualSeatAdjustment

84UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

WARNING!

Adjustingaseatwhilethevehicleismovingis dangerous. Thesuddenmovementoftheseatcould causeyoutolosecontrol. Theseatbeltmightnotbe properlyadjustedandyoucouldbeinjured. Only adjustaseatwhilethevehicleisparked.

ManualSeatHeightAdjustment—IfEquipped

The driver's seat height can be raised or lowered by using the ratcheting handle, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat; push downward on the handle to lower the seat.

SeatHeightAdjustment

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE85

FrontSeatbackRecline

Lean forward before lifting the handle, then lean back to the desired position and release the handle. Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright position.

ReclineLever

FrontEasyEntrySeats—TwoDoorModels

Push the lever on the seatback rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to tilt the entire seat forward.

EasyEntryLever

86UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

EasyEntryCombinationLever—IfEquippedEasyEntrySeat

EasyEntrySeatWithCombinationLever—IfEquipped

1. To return the seat to a sitting position, rotate the seatback upright until it locks.
2. Push the seat rearward until the track locks.

NOTE:

- The front driver seat has a full recliner memory, which will allow the seatback to be returned to its original

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE87

position. If equipped with combination lever the seat-back will return to its first locked position. The recliner handle will have to be actuated to adjust the seatback to the desired reclined position.

• The front passenger seats have a track memory, which returns the seat to just past the halfway point of the track regardless of its original position.
• The recliner and easy entry levers should not be used during the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting position.

HeadRestraints

Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of a rear impact. Adjustable head restraints should be adjusted so that the upper edge is as high as practical. The front head restraints have a locking button that must be pushed inward to lower the head restraint.

88UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

The restraints may be raised without pushing in the button. The rear head restraints are not adjustable.

AdjustableHeadRestraints

FoldandTumbleRearSeat—TwoDoorModels

NOTE:

- Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to reposition the front seats.

- Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.

1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the seatback forward.

RearSeatRelease

1. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.

FoldingRearSeat

1. Return the seat to the normal position.
2. Raise the rear seatback using the assist strap and firmly lock the seat into position.

RemovingtheRearSeat—TwoDoorModels

WARNING!

• Itisextremelydangeroustorideinacargoarea, insideoroutsideofavehicle.Inacollision,people ridingintheseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.
• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.
• Inacollision, you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments. Always besure that these seats are fully latched.

90UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Remove the three rear subwoofer (if equipped) mounting nuts using a 15 mm socket.

Subwoofer

1. Unplug the electrical connector from the rear subwoofer (if equipped).

2. Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1 through 3 under "Fold and Tumble Rear Seat" in this section.

3. Press down on the release bar on each side, and pull the seat out and away from the lower bracket.
4. Remove the seat from the vehicle.

ReleaseBarLocation

ReplacingtheRearSeat—TwoDoorModels

Reverse the steps for removing the seat.

WARNING!

• Tohelpprotectagainstpersonalinjury,passengers shouldnotbeseatedintherearcargoareawiththe rearseatfoldeddownorremovedfromtheve- hicle.
• Therearcargospaceisintendedforloadcarrying purposesonly,notforpassengerswhoshouldsitinseatsanduseseatbelts.

60/40SplitFoldingRearSeat—FourDoor Models

To provide additional storage area, each rear seat can be folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE91

NOTE:

• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary to reposition the front seat to its mid-track position.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily.

WARNING!

• Itisextremelydangeroustorideinacargoarea, insideoroutsideofavehicle.Inacollision,people ridingintheseareasaremorelikelytobeseriouslyinjuredorkilled.
• Donotallowpeopletorideinanyareaofyour vehiclethatisnotequippedwithseatsandseat belts.
• Besureeveryoneinyourvehicleisinaseatand usingaseatbeltproperly.

92UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

ToFoldDowntheRearSeat

Locate the pull strap (lower outboard side of seat), and pull it toward you until the seatback releases.

PullStrap

ToRaisetheRearSeat

Raise the seatback and lock it into place. If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking, you will have difficulty returning the seat to its proper position.

NOTE: If the rear seatback is not fully latched, the center shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use. If you cannot extend the center shoulder belt, make sure your seatback is fully latched.

WARNING!

Becertainthattheseatbackissecurelylockedinto position.Iftheseatbackinnotsecurelylockedinto positiontheseatwillnotprovidetheproperstability forchildseatsand/orpassengers.Animproperly latchedseatcouldcauseseriousinjury.

TOOPENANDCLOSETHEHOOD

Release both the hood latches.

HoodLatch

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE93

Raise the hood and locate the safety latch, located in the middle of the hood opening. Push the latch to the left side of the vehicle, to open the hood. You may have to push down slightly on the hood before pushing the safety latch. Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood.

To close the hood, remove the support rod from the hood panel and place it in the retaining clip. Lower the hood slowly. Secure both of the hood latches.

WARNING!

If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision. Besure all hood latches are latched fully before driving.

94UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

LIGHTS

MultifunctionLever

The multifunction lever controls the operation of the parking lights, headlights, headlight beam selection, passing light, fog lights, instrument panel light dimming and turn signals. The lever is located on the left side of the steering column.

MultifunctionLever

ParkingLights,InstrumentPanelLightsand Headlights

Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent for parking lights and instrument panel lights. Turn to the second detent for headlight operation.

HeadlightSwitch

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE95

To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights, rotate the center portion of the multifunction lever up or down.

NOTE:

• Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process.
• If the driver's door is left open, and the headlights or parking lights are left on, the high Beam Indicator Light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound.

Lights-OnReminder

If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when the driver's door is opened.

96UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOF YOUR VEHICLE

HeadlightDimmerSwitch

Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released.

FrontFogLights—IfEquipped

The front fog light switch is located on the multifunction lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the end of the lever.

NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the parking lights or the headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.

TurnSignals

Move the multifunction lever up or down, and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash, to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

If either light has a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator is defective or there may be a circuit failure.

NOTE:A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile (2 km).

LaneChangeAssist

Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times the automatically turn off.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE97

DaytimeRunningLights—IfEquipped

The headlights come on at a low intensity level after the vehicle has been driven approximately 3 ft (1 m). They will turn off when the vehicle is turned off or when the headlights are switched on.

InteriorLights

The overhead light will come on when a door is opened. It may also be turned on by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward.

The overhead light will automatically turn off in approximately 20 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the dome light position. Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the overhead light operation.

CargoLamp

The courtesy and dome lights will turn on when the front doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating wheel on the right side of the switch) is rotated to the upward detent position, or if equipped, when the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.

Also, the rear cargo lamp may be turned on by pressing the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn the light off.

CargoLamp

98UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the off detent will cause all the interior lights to turn off. This is also known as the "Party" mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle's battery.

RearCargoLamp(Four-DoorModels)

DaytimeBrightnessFeature

Certain instrument panel components (instrument cluster, radio display) can be illuminated at full brightness during the daytime. This can be helpful when driving with your headlights on during the daytime, such as in a parade or a funeral procession. To activate this feature, rotate the left stalk one detent lower than the dome light.

The windshield wiper/washer control lever operates the windshield wipers and washers when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The lever is located on the right side of the steering column.

Rotate the end of the control lever upward to the second detent for low-speed wiper operation, or to the third detent for high-speed operation.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE99

High/LowSpeed

1 — Low-Speed Operation
2 — High-Speed Operation

CAUTION!

Incoldweather, alwaysturnoffthewiperswitchand allowthewiperstoreturntotheparkpositionbefore turningofftheengine. Ifthewiperswitchislefton andthewipersfreezetothewindshield, damageto thewipermotormayoccurwhenthevehicleis restarted.

100UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

IntermittentWiperSystem

Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Move the lever to the delay position, then select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever. The delay can be regulated between 2 to 30 seconds between cycles.

IntermittentSettings

1 — Minimum Delay
2 — Maximum Delay

WindshieldWashers

To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in the delay range, the wiper will operate for two wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected.

If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers will operate for as long as the lever is held plus one wipe cycle, then turn off.

MistFeature

Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the wipers will continue to operate.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE101

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.

TILTSTEERINGCOLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the steering column, below the turn signal lever.

102UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired. Pull upwards on the lever to lock the column firmly in place.

TiltSteeringColumn

WARNING!

Tiltingthesteeringcolumnwhilethevehicleis movingisdangerous.Withoutastablesteeringcolumn,youcouldlosecontrolofthevehicleandhave anaccident.Adjustthecolumnonlywhilethevehicleisstopped.Besureitislockedbeforedriving.

ELECTRONICSPEEDCONTROL—IFEQUIPPED

Electronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator operation at speeds greater than 35 mph (56 km/h). The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel.

81bc4c2c

ElectronicSpeedControlLever

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE103

simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.

ToActivate

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the Electronic Speed Control system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The Electronic Speed Control system should be turned off when not in use.

104UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

WARNING!

LeavingtheElectronicSpeedControlsystemon whennotinuseisdangerous.Youcouldaccidentally setthesystemorcauseittogofasterthanyouwant.Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.Always leavetheElectronicSpeedControlsystemoffwhen youarenotusingit.

ToSetaDesiredSpeed

When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.

ToDeactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you, or normal brake or

clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory.

ToResumeSpeed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

ToVarytheSpeedSetting

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the RESUME ACCEL position, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the lever is released. Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE105

Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a1mph (1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is tapped, speed increases so that tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.

To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set, push down and hold the SET DECEL lever. If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph (10 km/h) increments until the lever is released. Release the lever when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed will be established.

Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is tapped, speed decreases.

ManualTransmission

Pressing the clutch pedal will disengage the Electronic Speed Control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the Electronic Speed Control disengages is normal.

Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may need to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss.

WARNING!

ElectronicSpeedControlcanbedangerouswherethe systemcannotmaintinaconstantspeed.Yourvehicle couldgotoofastfortheconditions,andyoucouldlose control.Anaccidentcouldbetheresult.Donotuse ElectronicSpeedControlinheavytrafficoronroads thatarewinding,icy,snow-coveredorslippery.

ToAccelerateforPassing

Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

106UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

UsingElectronicSpeedControlOnHills

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain and/or more frequent downshifts (auto transmission only) may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control.

There are two 12-Volt (DC) auxiliary power outlets that can provide up to 160 Watts (13 Amps) of current for accessories designed for use with the standard power outlet adapters. The power outlet, located in the lower portion of the instrument panel, has a snap-on plastic cap so that it can be covered when not in use. When the optional cigar lighter heating element is used in the left-side power outlet, it heats when pushed in and pops out automatically when ready for use. Topreservetheheatingelement, donot holdthelighterintheheatingposition.

NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12-Volts.

PowerOutlets

The left-side power outlet is powered when the key is in the ON or ACC positions.

The right-side power outlet is powered directly from the battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the engine from starting.

WARNING!

Toavoidseriousinjuryordeath:

• Onlyconnectorsdesignedforuseinthistypeof outletshouldbeinsertedintoany12Voltoutlet.
• Donottouchwithwethands.
• Closethelidwhennotinuseandwhiledriving thevehicle.
• If this outletismishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure.

CAUTION!

• Manyaccessoriesthatcanbepluggedindraw powerfromthevehicle'sbattery,evenwhennotin use(i.e.,cellularphones,etc.).Eventually,if pluggedinlongenough,thevehicle'sbatterywill dischargesufficientlytodegradebatterylife and/orpreventtheenginefromstarting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only us these intermittently and with greater caution.
• Aftertheuseofhigh-powerdrawaccessories,or longperiodsofthevehiclenotbeingstarted(with accessoriesstillpluggedin),thevehiclemustbe drivenasufficientlengthoftimetoallowthe alternatortorechargethevehicle'sbattery.

(Continued)

108UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Poweroutletsaredesignedforaccessoryplugs only.Donothanganytypeofaccessoryoraccessorybracketfromtheplug.

CUPHOLDERS

FrontCupholders

The front cupholders are located in the center console.

FrontCupholders

NOTE: The front cupholder insert is removable for cleaning.

RearCupholders

The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center console.

RearCupholders

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE109

STORAGE

ConsoleStorageCompartment

To lock or unlock the storage compartment, insert ignition the key and turn. To open the storage compartment, press the latch and lift the cover.

CenterConsole

110UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

RearStorageCompartment

The rear storage compartment cover is held by a spring-loaded latch. In order to remove the rear storage compartment cover, use the following procedure:

NOTE: Therearstoragecompartmentlatchshouldnot beusedascargotie-down.

1. Flip up the pull loop so it is perpendicular (straight up) to the top surface of the tray.
2. Pull up on the loop and twist it 90 degrees, so it is parallel to the slotted hole in the tray.
3. Open the rear compartment cover.

RearStorageCover

DUALTOP—IFEQUIPPED

If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, youmust removeoneofthetopsfromthevehicle. If thesofttop is removed, the pivotbrackets must also be removed from the sportbar. The soft top was installed at the factory for shipping purposes only. Thesofttop and the

hardtoparetobeusedindependently. Removal is mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the soft top. Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the same time for extended periods of time.

RemovingtheSoftTop

1. Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the following items:

• Right and left door frames
- Door frame attachment knobs (four for two-door models, six for four-door models)
• Right and left quarter windows
- Rear window
- Two rear window roll up straps
- Two Sunrider® secure straps (if equipped)

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE111

- Two rear swing gate brackets

1. Remove the hard top. Refer to "Freedom Top Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Removal" later in this section.
2. Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket screws (two per side) using a #T30 Torx®head driver.

112UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Using a rubber mallet, carefully tap the knuckles from the left and right metal pivot brackets. Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store in a clean, dry location.

1. Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose the pivot brackets. Remove the brackets using a #T30 Torx® head driver. Recover and re-zip the sports bar cover. Store the pivot brackets and screws in a safe place.

1. Reinstall the hard top. Refer to "Freedom Top Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Installation" later in this section.

InstallingtheSoftTop

NOTE: The following procedures are for first time set up only. For future soft top procedures, refer to "Soft Top" in this section.

1. Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top removal:

- Door frame attachment knobs (four for two-door models, six for four-door models)

• Right and left quarter windows

- Rear window

1. Remove the hard top. Refer to "Freedom Top Three-Piece Modular Hard Top — Front/Rear Panel Removal" later in this section.

2. Install the door frames. Refer to "Door Frame" in this section.

3. If the soft top has been removed, follow these steps to reinstall the soft top. If the soft top is on the vehicle, proceed to step #5.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE113

a. If the pivot brackets have been removed, unzip the sport bar covers and attach the pivot brackets to the sports bar with the four screws that were removed using a #T30 Torx®head driver. Re-cover and re-zip the sport bar covers.

114UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

b. Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the bows pointing forward and the curved portion of the bows facing upward.

c. Tap the knuckles on the side with a rubber mallet to reattach them to the metal pivot brackets.

d. Screw the pivot screws back into place using a #T30 Torx®head driver. Secure them until they are snug, being careful not to cross-thread the screws or over-tighten.

FREEDOMTOPTHREE-PIECEMODULARHARD TOP—IFEQUIPPED

CAUTION!

Donotovertightenthescrews. You can strip the screws if they are overtightened.

1. Remove the swing gate bar (black metal bar for bottom of rear window) and set aside.

NOTE: Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top.

1. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This cover should be discarded. It was intended as a protective cover for shipping only.

NOTE: A visual instruction sheet is enclosed in the dual top wrap.

1. Put up the soft top. Refer to "Soft Top — Putting Up the Soft Top" in this section.

CAUTION!

• Thehardtopisnotdesignedtocarryanyaddi-tionalloadssuchasroofracks,sparetires,building,hunting,orcampingsupplies,and/orluggage,etc.Also,itwasnotdesignedasastructural memberofthevehicle,andthuscannotproperly carryanyadditionalloadsotherthanenvironmental(rain,snow,etc.).
• Donotmoveyourvehicleuntilthetophasbeen eitherfullyattachedtothewindshieldframeand bodyside,orfullyremoved.

116UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew:

• Itisrecommendedthatthetopbefreeofwater prioritopanelremoval.Removingthetop,opening adoororloweringawindowwhilethetopiswet mayallowwatertodripintothevehiclesinterior.
• Thehardtopassemblymustbepositionedproperlytoensuresealing.Improperinstallationcan causewatertoleakintothevehiclesinterior.
• Carelesshandlingandstorageoftheremovable roofpanelsmaydamagetheseals,causingwaterto leakintothevehiclesinterior.
• Thefrontpanel(s)mustbepositionedproperlyto ensuresealing.Improperinstallationcancause watertoleakintothevehiclesinterior.

FrontPanel(s)Removal

NOTE: Left panel must be removed before removing right panel.

1. Fold down the sun visor, and move it to the side.
2. Turn the center L-shaped locks (two) from the center of the roof panel.

1. Turn the rear L-shaped lock (located above the shoulder belt anchorage).

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE117

1. Turn the rear fasteners (knobs) (located on the overhead speaker bar assembly) counter-clockwise until they can be removed.

118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Unlatch the header panel latch located at the top of the windshield.

1. Remove the panel.

To remove the right panel, follow the steps above except for Step 2.

FrontPanel(s)Installation

NOTE: Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no overhang. Also, make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body.

1. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.
2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal in reverse order.

FrontPanel(s)InstallationOnly(WithRearHard TopRemoved)

1. Turn the left and right panels over and move the spacer block (located on the rear of the panel) upward 90 degrees.

NOTE: The front panel(s) must be positioned properly to ensure sealing. Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no overhang. Also, make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE119

1. Install the right panel first, then the left panel.
2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps for removal in reverse order.

RearHardTopRemoval

1. Remove both front panels. Refer to "Front Panel(s) Removal" in this section.
2. Open both doors.
3. Remove the two Torx®head screws that secure the hard top at the B-pillar (near the top of the door) using a #40 Torx®head driver (Four-Door Only).
4. Remove the six Torx® head screws that secure the hard top to the vehicle (along the interior bodyside) using a #40 Torx® head driver.

120UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of the rear window glass. Lift the rear window glass.

1. Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner of the vehicle.

1. Disconnect the rear window washer hose and install the tethered cap.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE121

CAUTION!

Makesurethestoragecapisinstalledtoprevent foreignmaterialsfromenteringthewashertubeand cloggingsystem,andalsotopreventfluidfrombeing sprayedintotherearofthevehicle.

1. Disconnect the wire harness from the hard top by pressing the tab at the side of the connector and pulling to disconnect.

NOTE: If the red latch on the connector is locked, push the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch on one end (right) of the connector. This will unlock the connector tab, allowing the tab to be pressed down and enabling the harness to be disconnected from the hard top.

1. Close the swing gate.

2. Remove the hard top from the vehicle. Place on a soft surface to prevent damage.

122UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

RearHardTopInstallation

NOTE: If the door frames are installed from soft top usage, they must be removed prior to installation of the hard top.

1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if necessary.
2. Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in reverse order.

NOTE: Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform gap between the lift glass and hard top.

DOORFRAME

WARNING!

• Donotdriveyourvehicleonpavementwiththe doorframe(s)removedasyouwilllosetheprotectionthattheycanprovide.Thisprocedureis furnishedforuseduringoff-roadoperationonly.
• Donotdriveyourvehicleonpublicroadswiththe doorsremovedasyouwilllosetheprotectionthat theycanprovide.Thisprocedureisfurnishedfor useduringoff-roadoperationonly.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew:

- Openingadoororloweringawindowwhilethetop iswetmayallowwatertodripintothevehicle's interior.

(Continued)

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE123

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Carelesshandlingandstorageoftheremovable doorframe(s)maydamagetheseals,causingwater toleakintothevehicle'sinterior.
• Thedoorframe(s)mustbepositionedproperlyto ensuresealing.Improperinstallationcancause watertoleakintothevehicle'sinterior.

DoorFrameRemoval—Two-DoorModels

1. Unscrew and remove the door frame attachment knobs (two per side).

WARNING!

Usebothhandstoremovethedoorframes. Thedoor frameswillfoldandcouldcauseinjuryifbothhands arenotused.

124UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the front of the door frame.
2. Pull the frame toward you with your rearward hand to remove the frame from the vehicle.

1. Screw the knobs back into the door frame and fold for storage. Store in a secure location.

WARNING!

• Donotdriveyourvehicleonpavementwiththe doorframe(s)removedasyouwilllosetheprotectionthattheycanprovide.Thisprocedureis furnishedforuseduringoff-roadoperationonly.
• Donotdriveyourvehicleonpublicroadswith thedoorsremovedasyouwilllosetheprotection thattheycanprovide.Thisprocedureisfurnished foruseduringoff-roadoperationonly.

WARNING!

Neverstorethedoorframesinyourvehicle.Inan eventofanaccident,aloosedoorframemanycause personalinjury.Ifremoved,alwaysstorethedoor framesoutsideofthevehicle.

DoorFrameInstallation—Two-DoorModels

1. Unfold door frame and unscrew thumbscrews.
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side, behind the door opening.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE125

1. After the door frame pin has been set into the body side hole, carefully set the front of the door frame into the rubber seal at the top of the windshield.
2. Starting with the front of the door frame, clip it over the metal side bar and then clip the rear, making sure that the material for the side bar covers is not pinched by the door frame.

126UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Starting with the front knob, screw in and tighten both knobs. Repeat on the other side.

DoorFrameRemoval—Four-DoorModels

1. Unscrew and remove the two forward most door frame attachment knobs.

WARNING!

Usebothhandstoremovethedoorframes. Thedoor frameswillfoldandcouldcauseinjuryifbothhands arenotused.

1. Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the upper front of the front door frame.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE127

1. Pull the frame toward you with your front hand to remove the frame from the vehicle.
2. Unscrew and remove the remaining door frame attachment knob on the rear door frame.

128UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the upper front of the rear door frame. Pull the frame toward you with your rear hand to remove the frame from the vehicle.

1. Screw the knob back into the door frame and fold for storage. Store in a secure location.

81924c19

WARNING!

• Donotdriveyourvehicleonpavementwiththe doorframe(s)removedasyouwilllosetheprotectionthattheycanprovide.Thisprocedureis furnishedforuseduringoff-roadoperationonly.
• Donotdriveyourvehicleonpublicroadswith thedoorsremovedasyouwilllosetheprotection thattheycanprovide.Thisprocedureisfurnished foruseduringoff-roadoperationonly.

WARNING!

Neverstorethedoorframesinyourvehicle.Inan eventofanaccident,aloosedoorframemanycause personalinjury.Ifremoved,alwaysstorethedoor framesoutsideofthevehicle.

DoorFrameInstallation—Four-DoorModels

1. Install the rear door frame first.
2. Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side, just behind the rear door opening.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE129

1. Position the top of the door frame against the metal sport bar and press onto the side bar making sure not to pinch the material of the sports bar covers and to ensure it is properly positioned on the seal above the front of the rear door.

1. Loosely install the rear knob (long knob) to hold the door rail in position.

130UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Carefully set the front of the front door frame in the rubber seal at the top of the windshield. Then, clip the front of the door rail over the side bar making sure that the material for the side bar cover is not pinched by the door frame. Position the rear of the front door frame to lay on top of the front of the rear door frame.

1. Loosely install both knobs beginning with the front knob (long knob). Then, install the middle knob (short knob) through the front and rear door frames and screw into the top of the B-pillar.

2. Tighten the front knob, then the rear most knob, and then the middle knob. Repeat this procedure for the other side.

SOFTTOP—TWODOORMODELS

Please visit the owners section of Jeep.com for instructional videos.

CAUTION!

Thesofttopisnotdesignedtocarryanyadditional loadssuchasroofracks,sparetires,building,hunting,orcampingsupplies,and/orluggage,etc.Also,it wasnotdesignedasastructuralmemberofthe vehicleand,thus,cannotproperlycarryanyaddi-tionalloadsotherthanenvironmental(rain,snow, etc.).

If the temperature is below 72° F ( 24° C) and/or the top has been folded down for a period of time, the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it difficult to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE131

Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be installed. If the temperature is 41° F ( 5° C) or below, donot attempt to put the top down or roll therearorside curtains.

CAUTION!

• Donotrunafabrictophroughanautomaticcar wash. Windowscratchesandwaxbuildupmay result.
• Donotlowerthetopwhenthetemperatureis below 41°F(5°C) . Damagethetopmayresult.
• Donotmoveyourvehicleuntilthetophasbeen eitherfullyattachedtothewindshieldframe,or fullylowered.
• Donotlowerthetopwiththewindowsinstalled. Windowandtopdamagemayoccur.

(Continued)

132UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Referto"AppearanceCareforFabricTopModels" in Section7ofthismanual.Itcontainsimportant informationoncleaningandcaringforyourvehicle'sfabrictop.
• Donotuseanytools(screwdrivers,etc.)topryor forceanyoftheclamps,clips,orretainerssecuring thesofttop.Donotforceorprysthesofttop frameworkwhenopeningorclosing.Damageto thetopmayresult.

WARNING!

• Donotdrivethevehiclewiththerearwindow curtainupunlesssthesidecurtainsarealsore-moved.Dangerousexhaustgasescouldenterthe vehiclecausingharmtothedriverandpassengers.
• Thefabricupperdoorsandfabrictoparedesigned onlyforprotectionagainsttheelements.Donot relyonthemocontainoccupantswithinthe vehicleortoprotectagainstinjuryduringan accident.Remember,alwayswearseatbelts.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mildew on the top material:

• Itisrecommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drop into the vehicle's interior.
• Carelesshandlingandstorageofthesofttopmay damagetheseals,causingwatertoleakintothe vehicle'sinterior.
• Thesofttopmustbepositionedproperlytoensure sealing.Improperinstallationcancausewaterto leakintothevehicle'sinterior.

134UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

FoldingDownTheSoftTop

1 — Header Bow 6 — Body Side Retainer
2 — 2-Bow 7 — Quarter Window
3 — 3-Bow 8 — Check Strap
4 — Sail Panel 9 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window
5 — Plastic Retainer 10 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE135

1 — Zipper Start
2 — Zipper Finish
3 — Swing Gate Bar
4 — Swing Gate Brackets
5 — Sail Panels

136UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

NOTE: Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top. If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust, etc., clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush. Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer.

1. If your vehicle has half doors, remove each half-door window by opening the door and lifting the half-door window out.

NOTE: Stow the half-door windows carefully outside of the vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.

1. Insert your finger behind the plastic retainer. Pull down and roll the retainer out of the channel. Repeat this on the opposite side.

1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.

2. Release the header latches and leave the hooks in the loops on the windshield.

1. Open the swing gate.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE137

1. Before unzipping the rear window, release the first 3 in (7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the channel. Remove the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out of the swing gate brackets.

138UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

- Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower corner of the window. Pull the zipper up, across the top and down to the left lower corner. Zipper pulls willstayontherearwindow.Pull down on the rear window to disengage it from the zipper on the top cover. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching.

1. Undo the Velcro ^® that runs along the top and rear edge of the side window.
2. Beginning from the rear lower corner, completely unzip the window.

1. Once unzipped, remove the side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel. Repeat this step on the opposite side.

2. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE139

NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.

1. As you begin to lower the top, fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft top.

140UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed unless the hard top is being installed. To remove the swing gate brackets, pull the front of the bracket forward while rolling the entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to disengage.

1. Completely release the latches from the loops on the windshield frame. If your vehicle is not equipped with the Sunrider® package, proceed to Step 16.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE141

1. Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid forward over the Sunrider® link (Sunrider® Models only).

1. Unlatch the side bows from both door rails (Sun-rider®Models only).

1. Before lowering the top, open the swing gate to prevent possible damage to the rear center high-mounted brake light. Move to the front of the vehicle. Grasp the side bow behind the header and lift the top, folding it toward the rear of the vehicle.

142UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operation.

1. Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the bows and as far inward as possible. This will keep any portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle.

When the top is completely down, position the drip rails so they make a "v-shape"; this prevents damage to the soft top material.

1. Close the front header latches.

2. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer to "Door Frame" in this section.

PuttingUpTheSoftTop

1 — Header Bow 6 — Body Side Retainer
2—2-Bow 7—Quarter Window
3 — 3-Bow 8 — Check Strap
4 — Sail Panel 9 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window
5 — Plastic Retainer 10 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window

144UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1 — Zipper Start
2 — Zipper Finish
3 — Swing Gate Bar
4 — Swing Gate Brackets
5 — Sail Panels

1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Install door frames, if removed. Refer to "Door Frame" in this section.
3. Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid rearward over Sunrider®link (Sunrider®Models only).

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE145

1. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the top by the side bow and the 2-bow (middle bow) up and over the sports bar until the header rests on the top of the windshield frame.

1. Before attaching the header latches, be sure that the top retainers above the door are not trapped between the top and the door frame.

146UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Make sure the Sunrider® bracket on the side bows latches to the door rails (Sunrider® Models only).
2. Open the header latches and engage the hook on each side onto the windshield loops (do not close the latches).

1. If the swing gate brackets were removed, install them by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior side of the body channel. Then, rotate it rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail. To be properly located, the bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail edge.

1. Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail panels over the rear roof bow.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE147

1. Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side channel, leaving the last 3 in (7.6 cm) toward the rear window loose (on both sides). Pulling down on the rear roof bow (3-bow) will aid to reach the channel with the retainers.

148UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. To install the side windows, affix the window temporarily by attaching to the Velcro® in the rear corner. Start the zipper but close only about 1 in (2.5 cm).

1. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window.

1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion

1. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel, beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE149

closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro® along the top and rear of the window. Repeat this step for the opposite side.

150UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear window. The spongy part of the seal should be down and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when closed.

1. Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends at the lower left corner of the rear window opening. Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned before zipping to prevent damage.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE151

152UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Run the zipper fully around to the right side of the window.
2. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the swing gate brackets.

1. Apply downward pressure on the top corner of the rear soft top bow (3-bow), then complete attaching the sail panel retainers into the body side channel.
2. Open the doors and insert the roof retainers into the channels above the door, starting at the front and working rearward.

1. Close the header latches and return the sun visors to their secured position.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE153

SOFTTOP(FOUR-DOORMODELS)

Please visit the owner's section of Jeep.com for instructional videos.

CAUTION!

Thesofttopisnotdesignedtocarryanyadditional loadssuchasroofracks,sparetires,building,hunting,orcampingsupplies,and/orluggage,etc.Also,it wasnotdesignedasastructuralmemberofthe vehicle,andthuscannotproperlycarryanyaddi-tionalloadsotherthanenvironmental(rain,snow, etc.).

If the temperature is below 72° F ( 24° C) and/or the top has been folded down for a period of time, the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it, making it difficult to put up. This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top.

154UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily on the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and the top can then be snapped into place. If the temperature is 41° F(5°C) or below, donot attempt to put the top down or roll therear or side curtains.

CAUTION!

• Donotrunafabrictophroughanautomaticcar wash.Windowscratchesandwaxbuildupmay result.
• Donotlowerthetopwhenthetemperatureis below 41°F(5°C) . Damagethetopmayresult.
• Donotlowerthetopwhenthewindowsaredirty. Gritmayscratchthewindow.
• Donotmoveyourvehicleuntilthetophasbeen eitherfullyattachedtothewindshieldframe,or fullylowered.

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Donotlowerthetopwiththewindowsinstalled. Windowandtopdamagemayoccur.
• Referto "AppearanceCareforFabricTopModels" in Section7 of this manual. It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle's fabric top.
• Donotuseanytools(screwdrivers,etc.)topryor forceanyoftheclamps,clips,orretainerssecuring thesofttop.Donotforceorprysthesofttop frameworkwhenopeningorclosing.Damageto thetopmayresult.

(Continued)

WARNING!

• Donotdrivethevehiclewiththerearwindow curtainupunlesssthesidecurtainsarealsoopen. Dangerousexhaustgaseswhichcankillcould enterthevehicle.
• Thefabricupperdoorsandfabrictoparedesigned onlyforprotectionagainsttheelements.Donot relyonthemtocontainoccupantswithinthe vehicleortoprotectagainstinjuryduringan accident.Remember,alwayswearseatbelts.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mild dew on the top material:

• Itisrecommendedthatthetopbefreeofwater priortoopeningit.Operatingthetop,openinga doororloweringawindowwhilethetopiswet mayallowwatertodripintothevehicle'sinterior.
• Carelesshandlingandstorageofthesofttopmay damagetheseals,causingwatertoleakintothe vehicle'sinterior.
• Thesofttopmustbepositionedproperlytoensure sealing.Improperinstallationcancausewaterto leakintothevehicle'sinterior.

156UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

NOTE: Do not remove any of the three attachment knobs unless you are planning on installing the hard top.

FoldingDownTheSoftTop

1 — Header Bow 6 — Body Side Retainer 11 — Plastic Retainer
2 — 2-Bow 7 — Quarter Window
3 — 3-Bow 8 — Check Strap
4 — 4-Bow 9 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window
5 — Sail Panel 10 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window

158UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1 — Zipper Start
2 — Zipper Finish
3 — Swing Gate Bar
4 — Swing Gate Brackets
5 — Sail Panels

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE159

NOTE: Clean side and rear windows before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top. If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust, etc., clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush. Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer.

1. If your vehicle has half-doors, remove each half-door window by opening the door and lifting the half-door window out.

NOTE: Stow half-door windows carefully outside of the vehicle, never inside, to avoid scratches.

1. Above the front of the rear door, place your finger up into the cutout in the plastic retainer and pull down, rolling both the front and rear retainers out of the door frame. Repeat this on the other side.

1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.

160UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Release the header latches and hooks from the loops on the windshield frame.

1. Open the swing gate.

2. Before unzipping the rear window, release the first 3 in (7.6 cm) of both sail panels from the channel. Remove the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out of the swing gate brackets.

- Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower corner of the window. Pull the zipper up, across the top and down to the left lower corner. Zipper pulls willstayontherearwindow.Pull down on the rear window to disengage it from the zipper on the top cover. Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratching.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE161

1. Undo the Velcro® that runs along the top and rear edge of the side window.
2. Beginning from the rear lower corner, completely unzip the window.

1. Once unzipped, remove the side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel. Repeat this step on the opposite side.

162UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle.

NOTE: When releasing the sail panel retainers, it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow.

1. Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft top.

1. The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed unless the hard top is being installed. To remove the swing gate brackets, pull the front of the bracket forward while rolling the entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to disengage.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE163

1. Grasp the front side bow behind the header, and lift the top.

164UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Fold back the front section of the top, pulling the fabric rearward. Gently rest the header on top of the rear portion of the deck.

2. Fold the top material so that the plastic retainers form a "W" as shown. Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds.

1. Release the side bows by pressing down on the latch above the front of the rear door. Push the top rearward to disengage. Repeat this step on the other side.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE165

1. Before lowering the top, open the swing gate to prevent possible damage to the rear center high-mounted brake light. Grasp the folded side bows and slide the top along the door frame track to the rear door frame.

166UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Gently slide the side bows off the door frame track and lower the top down into the vehicle.

NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operation.

1. Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the bows as far inside as possible. This will keep any portion of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle.

2. Once the top is fully down, use the Velcro® straps provided to secure the top to the vehicle by wrapping the strap around the side bows and through the slot on the body.

1. Close the front header latches.

2. Remove the door frames, if desired. Refer to "Door Frame" in this section.

PuttingUpTheSoftTop

1 — Header Bow 6 — Body Side Retainer 11 — Plastic Retainer
2 — 2-Bow 7 — Quarter Window
3 — 3-Bow 8 — Check Strap
4 — 4-Bow 9 — Front Retainer — Quarter Window
5 — Sail Panel 10 — Bottom Retainer — Quarter Window

168UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1 — Zipper Start
2 — Zipper Finish
3 — Swing Gate Bar
4 — Swing Gate Brackets
5 — Sail Panels

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE169

NOTE: Be extremely careful when putting up the soft top to prevent the doors from getting scratched. It may be helpful to open the rear doors.

1. Install the door frames, if removed. Refer to "Door Frame" in this section.
2. Undo the straps used to secure the top in the down position and store in secure location.
3. Open the swing gate.
4. Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top of the rear door frames.

NOTE: Help from another person will ease this operation.

170UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into the door frame tracks and slide the top forward.

1. Ensure that the top locks into the Sunrider ^® locking mechanisms that are located above the front of the rear doors.

1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Standing on the side of the vehicle, lift the top by the side bow until it rests on the windshield frame.

1. Before attaching the header latches, be sure the top retainers above the doors do not get trapped between the top and the door frame. Also, make certain the feet at

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE171

both ends of the 2-bow (forward-most bow) seat properly on the side bows above the front doors. They should cradle the tubing. Finally, make sure that the check strap (the long, woven strap reaching from the rear bow to the 2-bow) does not get entangled in any of the framework when unfolding the top.

172UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Open the header latches and engage the hook on each side onto the windshield loops (do not close the latches).

1. If the swing gate brackets were removed, install them by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior side of the body channel. Then, rotate it rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail. To be properly located, the bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail edge.

1. Ensure that the straps are positioned correctly before pulling the sail panels over the rear roof bow (4-bow).

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE173

Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side channel, leaving the last 3 in (7.6 cm) toward the rear window loose (on both sides). Pulling down on the rear roof bow (4-bow) will aid in reaching the channel with the retainers.

174UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. To install the side windows, affix the window temporarily by attaching it to the Velcro® in the upper rear corner. Start the zipper but close only about 1 in (2.5 cm).

1. Insert the front retainer of the window into the door channel, making sure the retainer is fully seated and properly positioned on the door frame. Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window.

1 — Incorrect Insertion
2 — Correct Insertion

1. Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel, beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle. Finish by

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE175

closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro® along the top and rear of the window. Repeat this step for the opposite side.

176UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Locate the black swing gate bar. Slide the swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear window. The spongy part of the seal should be down and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when closed.

1. Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends at the lower left corner of the rear window opening. Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned before zipping to prevent damage.

1. Run the first zipper fully around to the right side of the window.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE177

1. Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the swing gate brackets.

1. Complete the installation of the sail panel by inserting the rest of the retainer into the body channel.

178UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Open the doors and insert the top retainers into the channels in the door frame above the doors, starting at the front and working toward the rear of the vehicle.

1. Ensure the plastic retainer is tucked in properly at the B-pillar and not pinching the seal.

1. Close the header latches and return the sun visors to their secured position.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE179

SUNRIDER®(TWO-DOORMODELS)—IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!

Operatingthetop, openingadoororloweringa windowwhilethetopiswetmayallowwatertodrip intothevehicle'sinterior.

NOTE: If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph (64 km/h) with the Sunrider®feature open, it is recommended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle.

180UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE OpeningtheSunrider®

1. Insert your finger behind the plastic retainer. Pull down and roll the retainer out of the channel. Repeat this on the other side.

1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.

2. Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame.

1. Slide the plastic sleeve forward.

1. Grasp the header and lift the top back. Make sure the material is folded back as shown.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE181

NOTE: The Sunrider ^® latch on the door rail should not be activated for Sunrider ^® use. If activated, the soft top must be reinstalled starting from the sail panels.

182UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Locate the straps to secure the side bows. Wrap the straps around the bows as shown. Repeat on the other side.

1. Reposition the sun visors.

ClosingtheSunrider®

1. Remove the straps from the side bows.
2. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
3. Grasp the front header and pull it to the front of the vehicle.
4. Hook the header latches to the loops on the wind-shield frame, close latches, and return the sun visors to their original positions.
5. Slide the plastic sleeve rearward over the Sunrider® link.
6. Tuck the drip rail retainers into the door frame slots.

SUNRIDER®(FOUR-DOORMODELS)—IF EQUIPPED

CAUTION!

Operatingthetop, openingadoororloweringa windowwhilethetopiswetmayallowwatertodrip intothevehicle'sinterior.

NOTE: If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph (64 km/h) with the Sunrider® feature open, it is recommended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle.

ToOpen

1. Above the front of the rear door, place your finger up into the cutout in the plastic retainer and pull down, rolling both the front and rear retainers out of the door frame. Repeat this on the other side.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE183

NOTE: All plastic retainers must be removed from the door rail prior to the operation of the Sunrider®.

184UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Unclip and move the sun visors to the side.
2. Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame.

1. Grasp the front side bow behind the header, and lift the top.

1. Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest the header on top of the rear portion of the deck.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE185

1. Fold the top material so that the plastic retainers form a "W" as shown. Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds. Ensure that the straps are securely stowed.

1. Close the front header latches.

186UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Secure the top by using the two provided straps. Each strap will wrap around the side bow and Velcro® to itself; use one strap on each side of the vehicle.

ToClose

Perform the above steps in the opposite order.

NOTE: Failure to fold the fabric rearward will allow the material to sag and may block the rearview mirror.

FOLDINGWINDSHIELD

The fold-down windshield and removable side bars on your vehicle are structural elements that can provide some protection in some accidents. The windshield also provides some protection against weather, road debris and intrusion of small branches and other objects.

Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the windshield down and the side bars removed as you lose the protection these structural elements can provide.

If required for certain off-road uses, the side bars can be removed and the windshield folded down. However, the protection afforded by these features is then lost. If you remove the side bars and fold down the windshield, drive slowly and cautiously. It is recommended that the speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h), with low range operation preferred if you are driving off-road with the windshield folded down.

Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon as the task that required their removal is completed and before you return to on-road driving. Both you and your passenger should wear seat belts at all times, on-road and off-road, regardless of whether the windshield is raised or folded down.

Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors. If you choose to remove the doors, see your authorized dealer for a replacement cowl-mounted outside mirror. Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road use.

WARNING!

Carefully follow these warning stohelp protect against personal injury:

- Donotdriveyourvehicleon-roadwiththewind-shielddown.

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotdriveyourvehicleunlessthewindshieldis securelyfastened,eitherupordown.
• Eyeprotection, such as goggles, should beworn at all times when the windshield is down.
• Besurethatyoucarefullyfollowtheinstructions forraisingthewindshield.Makesurethatthe foldingwindshield,windshieldwipers,sidebars, and all associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled before driving yourvehicle.Failuretofollowtheseinstructions maypreventyourvehiclefromprovidingyouand yourpassengersprotectioninsomeaccidents.
• If you removethedoors, store them outsid the vehicle. In the event of an accident, aloosedoor may cause personal injury.

(Continued)

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lowering the Windshield and Removing Side Bars

1. Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top following the instructions in this manual.

NOTE: To assist in properly reinstalling side bars, mark the original locations prior to removing.

1. Remove the two top hex bolts (13 mm), and the one side hex bolt (13 mm) visible through the trim (Do not remove plastic corner trim, sun visor bolts, or sport bar covering).

1. Open the sport bar Velcro covering.

2. Remove the one hex bolt (13 mm) visible through the plastic trim on the bottom side of the side bar, one hex bolt (13 mm) on the side of the side bar, and one hex bolt (13 mm) on top of the side bar.

NOTE: Pull side bar out horizontally when removing.

CAUTION!

Donotremovetheheadimpactfoamfromtheside bars, asdamagetothefoammayresult.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE189

NOTE: Store all of the mounting bolts in their original threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping.

1. Remove the side bar assembly, and reattach the sport bar Velcro® covering.
2. To safely store the side bars in your vehicle, use four cinch straps (available from your authorized dealer). Attach the straps through the slots located on the floor behind the folded rear seat at the front of the storage bin cover.

WARNING!

Youorotherscouldbeinjuredifyoucarrytheside barslooseinyourvehicle.Removethesidebarsfrom thevehiclorsecurelystorethemasdescribedor theymaycausepersonalinjuryifanaccidentoccurs. Seeyourauthorizeddealerforthecinchstraps.

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

1. Remove the windshield wiper arms by first pulling the wiper away from the windshield and out to the "lock" position. Unsnap the wiper arm nut caps, and remove the retaining nuts. Lift the wiper arms off and store them in the center console or securely behind the rear seat.

NOTE: It may be necessary to use a battery terminal puller tool in order to separate the wiper arms from the shaft after the nuts have been removed.

1. Remove the lower windshield plates by removing the six black round-headed Torx®head screws (using a #40 Torx®head driver) on each side of the base of the windshield.

1. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the rubber hood bumpers.

2. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap through the footman hoop on the center of the hood and on the center of the windshield frame. Tighten the strap to secure the windshield in place.

RaisingtheWindshieldandReplacingSideBars

1. Raise the windshield.
2. Loosely attach the rear of the side bar to the sport bar. Refer to Step 4 of "Lowering Windshield And Removing Side Bars" earlier in this section.

- Reattach the sport bar Velcro®covering.

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE191

1. Attach the front of the side bar to the windshield frame.

- Install the top two hex bolts (13 mm) first, then the lower side hex bolt (13 mm). The lower side bolt will not align until the top two bolts are installed.

1. Tighten all side bar attachment bolts.

192UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE

1. Install the lower windshield plates with the six black round-headed Torx ^® head screws (using a #40 Torx ^® head driver) on each side of the base of the windshield.

1. Reinstall the wiper arms.

REARWINDOWFEATURES—HARDTOPONLY

RearWindowWiper/Washer—IfEquipped

A rotary ring switch on the control lever (located on the right side of the steering column), controls the operation of the rear wiper/washer function. Rotating the center of the switch up to the "On" position will activate the wiper. Rotating the switch ring beyond the "On" or "Off" position will activate the rear washer. The washer pump will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged. Upon release, the wipers will cycle three times before returning to the set position.

WindshieldWiper/WasherSwitch

1 — Rear Wiper Position
2 — Rear Washer Position

If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned to the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return

UNDERSTANDINGTHEFEATURESOFYOURVEHICLE193

to the "Park" position. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set at.

RearWindowDefroster—IfEquipped

The rear window defroster button is located on the bottom right-side of the blower control knob.

Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a second time.

NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements:

• Usecarewhenwashingtheinsideoftherear window.Donotuseabrasivewindowcleanerson theinteriorsurfaceofthewindow.Useasoftcloth andamildwashingsolution,wipingparallelto theheatingelements.Labelscanbepeeledoff aftersoakingwithwarmwater.
• Donotusescrapers, sharpinstruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interiorsurface of the window.
• Keepallobjectsasafedistancefromthewindow.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

■Instrument Panel Features.... 198

■Instrument Cluster 199

■Instrument Cluster Description....200

■Compass And Trip Computer — If Equipped.... 2 1 3

□Control Buttons 213

□Trip Conditions 214

□Compass Temperature Display ..... 2 1 5

■Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio And 6-Disc CD/DVD Changer (MP3/WMA AUX Jack) 218

□ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode ..... 219

☐Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 227

□ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files ..... 229

□List Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) 2 3 1

□Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA Play) 2 3 2

196UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

■Sales Code (RER/REN) — AM/FM/CD/DVD Radio – If Equipped ..... 2 3 4

☐Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition System (VR) — If Equipped ..... 2 3 4

☐Operating Instructions — uconnect® phone — If Equipped ..... 2 3 4

□Clock Setting Procedure....234

■Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) 237

□Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 2 3 7

☐Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 240

□Notes On Playing MP3 Files 242

☐Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 2 4 5

■Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo Radio With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius Radio. 246

□Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 2 4 6

☐Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play 252

□Notes On Playing MP3 Files 254

□List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ..... 2 5 6

□Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ..... 2 5 6

■uconnect®studios (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU Radios Only) 258

□ System Activation 258

□Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID) 258

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197

□Selecting uconnect®studios (Satellite) Mode 259

□Satellite Antenna 259

□Reception Quality 259

☐Operating Instructions — uconnect ^® studios (Satellite) Mode ..... 2 6 0

☐Operating Instructions — uconnect® phone (If Equipped) 262

☐Operating Instructions — Video Entertainment System (VES) ^TM (If Equipped) 263

■CD/DVD Maintenance 263

■Radio Operation And Cellular Phones ..... 2 6 3

■Climate Controls 264

□Manual Heater Only 264

□Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System — If Equipped 26

□Air Conditioning....269

□Operating Tips 270

198UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

INSTRUMENTPANELFEATURES

81c25955

1 — Air Outlet 6 — Climate Controls
2 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Power Outlet
3 — Horn 8 — Lower Switch Bank
4 — Radio 9 — Auxiliary Power Outlet / Cigar Lighter
5 — Glove Compartment

INSTRUMENTCLUSTER

200UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

INSTRUMENTCLUSTERDESCRIPTION

1. Fuel Gauge

The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank.

NOTE: When the ignition switch is turned to OFF, the fuel gauge, voltmeter, oil pressure and temperature gauges may not show accurate readings. When the engine is not running, turn the ignition switch to ON to obtain accurate readings.

2. Charging System Light

This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON, and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle's non-essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.

If jump starting is required, refer to "Jump Starting Procedures" in section 6 of this manual.

3. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

4. Low Fuel Warning Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.8 gal (10.6L) this light will turn on and a single chime will sound.

5. Speedometer

Indicates vehicle speed.

6. Front Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped

Indicates when the front axle lock has been activated.

7. Seat Belt Reminder Light

A warning chime and an indicator light will alert you to buckle the seat belts. When the belt is buckled, the chime will stop, but the light will stay on for about six seconds, until it times out.

8. Turn Signal Indicators

The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

9. Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The light should turn on momentarily when the engine

UNDERSTANDING YOURINSTRUMENT PANEL 201

is started, if the bulb does not come on, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

10. High Beam Indicator

This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever towards you to switch the headlights back to low beam. If the driver's door is open, and the headlights or park lights are left on, the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound.

202UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

11. Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on, it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.

WARNING!

Drivingvehiclewiththeredbrakelightonis dangerous.Partofthebrakesystemmayhavefailed. Itwilltakelongertostopthevehicle.Youcouldhave anaccident.Havethevehiclecheckedimmediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

12. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light

(ABS) After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indicate function check at vehicle start-up. If the light remains on after start-up or comes on and stays on at road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.

If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer immediately. Refer to "Anti-Lock Brake System" in Section 5 of this manual.

204UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

13. Airbag Warning Light

This indicator lights and remains lit for six to eight seconds when the ignition is first turned on. If the light does not come on for six to eight seconds, stays on or comes on while driving,

have the airbag system checked by an authorized dealer.

14. Rear Axle Lock Indicator — If Equipped

This light indicates when the rear axle lock has been activated.

15. Tachometer

Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM).

CAUTION!

Donotoperatetheenginewiththetachometer pointerintheredarea.Enginedamagewilloccur.

16. Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. If the engine is critically hot, a warning chime will sound 10 times. After the chime turns off, the engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out.

17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped

This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

18. Temperature Gauge

The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.

The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotenginecoolingsystemcould damageyourvehicle.Iftemperaturegaugereads"H" pulloverandstopthevehicle.Idlethevehiclewith theairconditionerturnedoffuntilthepointerdrops backintothenormalrange.Ifthepointerremainson the"H" andyouhearcontinuouschimes,turnthe engineoffimmediately,andcallanauthorizeddeal- ershipforservice.

WARNING!

Ahotenginecoolingsystemisdangerous.Youor otherscouldbebadlyburnedbysteamorboiling coolant.Youmaywanttocallanauthorizeddealer-shipforserviceifyourvehicleoverheats.Ifyou decidetolookunderthehoodyyourself,seeSection7 ofthismanual.FollowthewarningsundertheCoolingSystemPressureCappagraph.

1. Cruise Indicator
   CRUISE This indicator shows when the electronic speed control system is turned on.
2. 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to

4WD

rotate at the same speed.

206UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

21. Odometer / Trip Odometer Reset Button

Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Press and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers. The odometer must be in trip mode to reset.

22. Shift Lever Indicator

The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission.

23. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly, when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

CAUTION!

TheTPMShasbeenoptimizedfortheoriginal equipmenttiresandwheels.TPMSpressuresand warninghavebeenestablishedforthetiresize equippedonyourvehicle.Undesirablesystemoperationorsensordamagemayresultwhenusingreplacementequipmentthatisnotofthesamesize, type,and/orstyle.Aftermarketwheelscancause sensordamage.Donotusetiresealantfromacan,or balancebeadsifyourvehicleisequippedwitha TPMS,asdamagetothesensorsmayresult.

1. Odometer / Trip Odometer Display Area The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.

Vehicle Odometer Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, the following odometer messages will display:

door. .... DoorAjar

gATE. LiftgateAjar

LoWtirE. Low Tire Pressure

gASCAP Fuel Cap Fault

noFUSE. FuseFault

CHAngE OIL.... Oil Change Required

ESPOFF..... ESPDeactivated

LoW tirE

When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles.

gASCAP

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a "gASCAP" message will display in the odometer display area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.

noFUSE

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or damaged, a "noFUSE" message will display in the odometer display area. For more information on fuses and fuse locations refer to "Fuses" in Section 7.

CHAngE OIL Message

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (Do not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.

210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.

25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position, before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the condition checked promptly.

Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc. may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing.

CAUTION!

ProlongeddrivingwiththeMILoncouldcause damagetotheenginecontrolsystem.Italsocould affectfueleconomyanddrivability.IftheMILis flashing,severecatalyticconverterdamage and powerlosswillsoonoccur.Immediateserviceis required.

WARNING!

Amalfunctioningcatalyticconverter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperature than innormal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could result in deathor serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.

26. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light / Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light

If the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. This indicator light starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) becomes active. The ESP/TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. If the ESP/TCS Indicator Light is on solid, the ESP system has been turned off by the driver or a temporary condition exists that will not allow full ESP function.

27. O/D (Overdrive) Off Indicator Light

O/D This light will illuminate when the O/D OFF button has been selected and overdrive has been turned off. The O/D OFF button is located on the center console.

UNDERSTANDING YOURINSTRUMENT PANEL211

28. Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped

SWAY BAR

This indicator will illuminate when the front sway bar is disconnected.

29. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake Assist System (BAS) Warning Light

ESP BAS

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake

Assist System (BAS) warning light in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. The light should go out with the engine running. If the ESP/BAS warning light comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system. If this light stays illuminated, have the ESP and BAS checked at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in Section 5 for more information.

212UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

WARNING!

Ifawarninglightremainsonthesystemmaynotbe workingandyouwillnothavethebenefitofESPor BAS.Undercertaindrivingconditions,whereESPor BASwouldbebeneficial,you-ifyouhavenot adjustedyourdrivingspeedsandstoppinginorto accountforthelackofthefeature,maybeinaccident.

30. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash

depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on

with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

31. Compass / Mini-Trip Computer Display — If Equipped

When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows the Mini-Trip Computer messages. Refer to "Mini-Trip Computer" later in this section.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213

32. Compass / Mini-Trip Computer Button—If Equipped

Press this button to switch between the different functions.

COMPASSANDTRIPCOMPUTER—IF EQUIPPED

The Compass/Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster. It features a driver-interactive display (displays information such as outside temperature, compass direction, and trip information).

Compass/TripComputerDisplay

ControlButtons

Press and release the left button (on the instrument cluster) to access the computer displays.

Press and hold the left button (on the instrument cluster) for two to three seconds to switch from English to Metric displays.

214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Reset/ChangeDisplay

Press and hold the left button (on the instrument cluster) while function is being displayed to reset or change the display.

The following trip displays can be reset or changed:

• AVG ECO (changes to present fuel economy)

- ET (will reset display)

TripConditions

AverageFuelEconomy(AVGECO)

This display shows the average fuel economy.

EstimatedRange(DTE)

This display shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is based on the most recent trip information: (Average Fuel Economy) x (Fuel Remaining).

This display cannot be reset.

ElapsedTime(ET)

This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time since the last reset.

TripOdometer(ODO)

This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset. Press and release the right button (on the instrument cluster) to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B. Press and hold the right button while the odometer/trip odometer is displayed to reset.

TripA

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset.

TripB

Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215

CompassTemperatureDisplay

This display provides the outside temperature and one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing.

WARNING!

Evenifthedisplaystillreadsafewdegreesabove 32°F(0°C) ,theroadsurfacemaybeicy,particularly inwoodsoronbridges.Drivecarefullyundersuch conditionstopreventanaccidentandpossiblepersonalinjuryorpropertydamage.

CompassCalibration

The compass on your vehicle will automatically calibrate when new, and will continuously adjust itself over the

life of the vehicle. If the CAL indicator is on (or flashing), drive slowly (under 10 MPH [16 kmh]) in an open area until the CAL indicator is off.

NOTE:

• A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, etc.
• Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as cell phones, iPod's, radar detectors, PDA's and laptops) should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel. This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings.

216UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

AutomaticCompassCalibration

The self-calibrating feature of the compass eliminates the need to calibrate the compass for normal conditions. During a short initial period, the compass may appear erratic and the CAL symbol will appear (blinking) on the display. After the vehicle has completed at least one complete circle under 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from large metal objects, calibration will be complete when the CAL symbol is extinguished.

After initial calibration, the compass will continue to automatically update this calibration whenever the vehicle is in motion.

ManualCompassCalibration

NOTE: Before attempting a manual compass calibration, the engine must be running and the transmission in the PARK position (ifequipped).

If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set, you may wish to manually recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the compass:

1. First enter the variance mode. Press and hold the left button (located on the instrument cluster) for approximately 10 seconds to enter the variance mode, and release the button when the VAR (Compass Variance) symbol appears.

2. The current variance value will also be displayed. Once in the variance mode, it is necessary to release the button, and then press and hold it again (approximately 10 seconds) until CAL is displayed (solid, not blinking).

3. Manual compass calibration has been initiated. Drive the vehicle slowly in one or more circles under 5 mph (8 km/h) in an area free from large metal objects until the CAL symbol is extinguished.

When the CAL symbol is no longer displayed, the compass is calibrated and should display correct headings. Verify proper calibration by checking North (N), South (S), East (E), and West (W). If the compass does not appear accurate, repeat the calibration procedure in another area.

CompassVariance(VAR)

Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To ensure compass accuracy, the compass variance should be properly set according to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle will be driven. When properly set, the compass will automatically account for this difference.

SettingtheCompassVariance

Refer to the variance map for the correct compass variance zone. To check the variance zone, the ignition must be ON. Press and hold the left button (located on the instrument cluster) for approximately 10 seconds to enter the variance mode and release the button when the VAR symbol appears. The current variance value will also be displayed. To change the zone, press the left button once to increment the zone. The default is Zone 8. After Zone 15, the values will wrap around to Zone 1. When the correct zone is displayed (per the Compass Variance Zone Map) for the zone that the vehicle is located in, wait for about five seconds; then the trip computer will store the variance value in memory and the compass will resume normal operation.

218UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

NOTE: The U.S./Metric display will change from English to Metric or Metric to English before the VAR symbol appears, however, it will revert back to its original setting after programming the compass functions.

CompassVarianceMap

Outside Temperature

If the outside temperature is more than 131° F ( 55° C), the display will show 131° F ( 55° C). When the outside temperature is less than -40° F ( -40° C), the display will show -40° F ( -40° C).

SALESCODEREQ—AM/FMSTEREORADIO AND6-DISCCD/DVDCHANGER(MP3/WMAAUX JACK)

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219

042005200

REQRadio

OperatingInstructions-RadioMode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

PowerSwitch/VolumeControl(Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

ElectronicVolumeControl

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.

220UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

SCANButton

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.

VoiceRecognitionButtonuconnect® phone—If Equipped

Press this button to operate the uconnect® phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "uconnect® phone" in Section 3.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With uconnect" message will display on the radio screen.

PhoneButtonuconnect® phone—IfEquipped

Press this button to operate the uconnect® phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "uconnect® phone" in Section 3. If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With uconnect" message will display on the radio screen.

TIMEButton

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency.

ClockSettingProcedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save the time change.

5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the "SET HOME CLOCK" entry. Once in this display follow the above procedure, starting at step 2.

INFOButton

Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.

TUNEControl

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

SettingtheTone,Balance,andFade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

MUSICTYPEButton

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types:

ProgramType	16-DigitCharacter Display
No program type or undefined	None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
Information	Inform
Jazz	Jazz
News	News
Nostalgia	Nostalga
Oldies	Oldies
Personality Persnity
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R & B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency

station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

SETUPButton

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items:

NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to select an entry and make changes.

- DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode, selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu (if equipped).

224UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

- DISCPlay/Pause-You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).

- DVDPlayOptions-Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following:

- Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc (if equipped).

- Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages (if supported on the disc) (if equipped).

- Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if equipped).

NOTE:

• The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc.
• These selections can only be made while playing a DVD.
• VES™Power-Allows you to turn VES™ ON and OFF (if equipped).
• VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if equipped).
• VESTMCH1/CH2-Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
• SetHomeClock-Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225

TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save changes.

- PlayerDefaults-Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference.

Menu Language — If Equipped

Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu language (effective only if language supported by disc). If you want to select a language not listed, then scroll down and select "other." Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/ SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select.

Audio Language — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language (effective only if the language is supported by the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting "other." Enter the country code using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select.

Subtitle Language — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language (effective only if the language is supported by the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting "other." Enter the country code using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select.

Subtitles — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On.

Audio DRC — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range. The default is set to "High," and under this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is "Normal."

Aspect Ratio — If Equipped

Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen, pan scan, and letter box.

AutoPlay — If Equipped

When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play.

NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer-preferred settings.

AMandFMButtons

Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.

SETButton—ToSetthePushbuttonMemory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations}.

DISCButton

Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

OperationInstructions-(DISCMODEforCDandMP3/WMAAudioPlay,DVD-VIDEO)

The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region. These region codes must match in order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times.

CAUTION!

Theradiomayshutdownduringextremelyhot conditions. Whenthisoccurs, theradiowillindicate "DiscHot" and shutofffuntilasafetemperature is reached. This shutdownisnecessarytoprotectthe opticsoftheDVDplayerandotherradiointernal components.

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

LOADButton—LoadingCompactDisc(s)

Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays "INSERT DISC," insert the CD into the player.

228UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

Radio display will show "LOADING DISC" when the disc is loading and "READING DISC" when the radio is reading the disc.

CAUTION!

ThisCDplayerwillaccept4-3/4in(12cm)discsonly. TheuseofothersizeddiscsmaydamagetheCD playermechanism.

EjectButton—EjectingCompactDisc(s)

Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio display will show "EJECTING DISC" when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.

Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio.

The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

SEEKButton(CDMODE)

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3/MWA modes.

SCANButton(CDMODE)

Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing.

TIMEButton(CDMODE)

Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229

RW/FF(CDMODE)

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button works in a similar manner.

AMorFMButton(CDMODE)

Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.

NotesOnPlayingMP3/WMAFiles

The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

SupportedMedia(DiscTypes)

The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, WMA, DVD Video, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.

SupportedMediumFormats(FileSystems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

- Level 1: 12 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

- Level 2: 31 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

230UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/WMA files). Discs created with an option such as "keep disc open after writing" are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.

If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/WMA tracks on that disc.

SupportedMP3/WMAFileFormats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.

When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling

frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.

MPEG Specification	Sampling Frequency(kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3	48, 44.1, 32	320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3	24, 22.05, 16	160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48

WMA Specification	Sampling Frequency(kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
WMA 44.1 and 48		48, 64, 96, 128, 160, 192 VBR

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

PlaybackofMP3/WMAFiles

When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.

Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
- Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs

- Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc.

LISTButton(DISCModeforMP3/WMAPlay)

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

232UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

INFOButton(DISCModeforMP3/WMAPlay)

Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to "elapsed time" priority mode.

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file.

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to "elapsed time" display.

OperationInstructions-AuxiliaryMode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.

SEEKButton(AuxiliaryMode)

No function.

SCANButton(AuxiliaryMode)

No function.

EJECTButton(AuxiliaryMode)

No function.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233

TIMEButton(AuxiliaryMode)

Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds.

RW/FF(AuxiliaryMode)

No function.

SETButton(AuxiliaryMode)

No function.

OperatingInstructions—VoiceRecognition System(VR)(IfEquipped)

For the radio, refer to "Voice Recognition System (VR)" in Section 3.

For uconnect®“Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to “uconnect®phone” in Section 3.

OperatingInstructions-uconnect® phone(If Equipped)

Refer to "uconnect®phone" in Section 3.

OperatingInstructions-uconnect®studios (SatelliteRadio)(IfEquipped)

Refer to “uconnect®studios (Satellite Radio)” in this section.

OperatingInstructions-VideoEntertainment System(VES) ^TM (IfEquipped)

Refer to separate "Video Entertainment System (VES)TM Guide."

Dolby®

Manufactured under license from Dolby® Laboratories. "Dolby®" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby® Laboratories.

Macrovision

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is

234UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

intended for home and other limited viewing uses only, unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

DTS^TM

"DTSTM" and "DTSTM 2.0" are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

SALESCODE(RER/REN)—AM/FM/CD/DVD RADIO-IFEQUIPPED

NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit's faceplate.

The REN and RER radios contain a CD/DVD player, USB port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius Satellite Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows for easy menu selection.

The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System (GPS)-based Navigation system.

Refer to your uconnect® tunes (REN) or (RER) user's manual for detailed operating instructions.

OperatingInstructions—VoiceRecognition System(VR)—IfEquipped

For the radio, refer to "Voice Recognition System (VR)" in Section 3.

OperatingInstructions—uconnect® phone—If Equipped

Refer to "uconnect® phone" in Section 3.

ClockSettingProcedure

uconnect®gps—RERonly

The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the worldwide standard for time. This makes the system's clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235

ToManuallySettheClock—RER/REN

1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where "User Clock" is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the word "Hour" with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen where the word "Hour" with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.

5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where the word "Min" with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the screen where the word "Min" with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.

6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where the word "Save" is displayed.

ChangingDaylightSavingsTime

When selected, this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the current setting:

1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words "Daylight Savings." Touch the screen where the words "Daylight Savings" are displayed to change the current setting.

236UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

ShowTimeifRadioisOff

When selected, this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current setting:

1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in the box next to the words "Show Time if Radio is Off." Touch the screen where the words "Show Time if Radio is Off" are displayed to change the current setting.

ChangingtheTimeZone

1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. Touch the screen where the words "Set Time Zone" are displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you want to select, touch the screen where the word "Page" is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word "Save" is displayed.

SALESCODERES—AM/FMSTEREORADIO WITHHCDPLAYER(MP3AUXJACK)

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.

042305232

RESRadio

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237

OperatingInstructions—RadioMode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

PowerSwitch/VolumeControl(Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

ElectronicVolumeControl

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume, and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

238UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping, until you release it.

TIMEButton

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency.

ClockSettingProcedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.

3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.

4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.

5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies.

TUNEControl

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

SettingtheTone,Balance,andFade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

AM/FMButton

Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton—ToSetthePushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and

240UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons 1 - 6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).

DISCButton

Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to Disc modes.

OperationInstructions—CDMODEForCDAnd MP3AudioPlay

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

InsertingCompactDisc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

• ThisCDplayerwillaccept4-3/4in(12cm)discs only. Theuseofothersizeddiscsmaydamagethe CDplayermechanism.
• Donotuseadhesivelabels.Theselabelscanpeel awayandjamtheplayermechanism.
• RESisasingleCDplayer.Donotattempttoinsert asecondCDifoneisalreadyloaded.
• Dual-mediadistypes(onesideisaDVD,the othersideisaCD)shouldnotbeused,andthey cancausedamagetotheplayer.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241

EJECTButton-EjectingaCD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEKButton

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of

242UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes.

TIMEButton

Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF

Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton(RandomPlayButton)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play.

NotesonPlayingMP3Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243

SupportedMedia(DiscTypes)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

SupportedMediumFormats(FileSystems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
- Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name, and will assign

a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)

• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
- Level 1: 12 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)
- Level 2: 31 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as "keep disc open after writing" are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.

244UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

SupportedMP3FileFormats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rate.

MPEG Specification	Sampling Frequency(kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3	48, 44.1, 32	320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3	24, 22.05, 16	160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

PlaybackofMP3Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
- Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
- Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc.

OperationInstructions-AuxiliaryMode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.

TIMEButton(AuxiliaryMode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is OFF).

246UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

SALESCODERES/RSC—AM/FMSTEREO RADIOWITHCDPLAYER(MP3AUXJACK)AND SIRIUSRADIO

NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate.

042305233
RES/RSCRadio

OperatingInstructions—RadioMode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

PowerSwitch/VolumeControl(Rotary)

Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio.

ElectronicVolumeControl

The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it.

When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played.

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247

to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it.

VoiceRecognitionSystem(Radio)—IfEquipped Refer to "Voice Recognition System (VR)" in Section 3.

VoiceRecognitionButtonuconnect™ phone—If Equipped

Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "uconnect™ phone" in Section 3.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With UConnect" message will display on the radio screen.

PhoneButtonuconnect™ phone—IfEquipped Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature (if equipped). Refer to "uconnect™ phone" in Section 3.

If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle, a "Not Equipped With UConnect" message will display on the radio screen.

TIMEButton

Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency.

ClockSettingProcedure

1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.

248UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

1. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.

The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2.

INFOButton

Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies.

TUNEControl

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.

SettingtheTone,Balance,andFade

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid-range tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/

SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone, balance, and fade.

MUSICTYPEButton

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types:

ProgramType	16-DigitCharacter Display
No program type or undefined	None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language	Language
Information	Inform
Jazz	Jazz
News	News
Nostalgia	Nostalga
Oldies	Oldies
Personality Persnity
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name. The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.

SETUPButton

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items:

- Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton—ToSetthePushbutton Memory

When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM

and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM stations).

DISC/AUXButton

Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.

252UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

OperationInstructions—CDMODEforCDand MP3AudioPlay

NOTE:

• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.

InsertingCompactDisc(s)

Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.

If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will show the track number, and index time in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.

CAUTION!

• ThisCDplayerwillaccept4–3/4in(12cm)discs only. Theuseofothersizeddiscsmaydamagethe CDplayermechanism.
• Donotuseadhesivelabels.Theselabelscanpeel awayandjamtheplayermechanism.
• RESisasingleCDplayer.Donotattempttoinsert asecondCDifoneisalreadyloaded.
• Dual-mediadisctypes(onesideisaDVD,the othersideisaCD)shouldnotbeused,andthey cancausedamagetotheplayer.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253

EJECTButton-EjectingaCD

Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.

If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.

A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.

NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).

SEEKButton

Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes.

TIMEButton

Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display.

RW/FF

Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button works in a similar manner.

AM/FMButton

Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.

SET/RNDButton(RandomPlayButton)

Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace.

Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.

254UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.

NotesOnPlayingMP3Files

The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited. When writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.

SupportedMedia(DiscTypes)

The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.

SupportedMediumFormats(FileSystems)

The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension. When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.

The radio uses the following limits for file systems:

• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
- Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file names and folder names is limited. For large numbers of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead. With a maximum number of files, exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:

• Level 1: 12 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator "." and a three-character extension)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255

Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files). Discs created with an option such as "keep disc open after writing" are most likely multisession discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times.

SupportedMP3FileFormats

The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3 extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file.

When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported. In addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.

MPEG Specification	Sampling Frequency(kHz)	BitRate(kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3	48, 44.1, 32	320, 256, 224, 192, 160, 128, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio Layer 3	24, 22.05, 16	160, 128, 144, 112, 96, 80, 64, 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, 16, 8

ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios.

Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not supported.

256UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

PlaybackofMP3Files

When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files.

Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following:

• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than CD-R media
- Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer to load than non-multisession discs
- Number of files and folders - Loading times will increase with more files and folders

To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option before writing to the disc.

LISTButton(CDModeforMP3Play)

Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files).

The folder list will time out after five seconds.

INFOButton(CDModeforMP3Play)

Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File Name, and Folder Name (if available).

Press the INFO button once more to return to "elapsed time" priority mode.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257

Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file.

Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to "elapsed time" display.

OperationInstructions-AuxiliaryMode

The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle's audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.

Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.

NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the device's volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not loud enough, turn the device's volume up. If the AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device's volume down.

TIMEButton(AuxiliaryMode)

Press this button to change the display to time of day. The time of day will display for five seconds (when the ignition is OFF).

OperatingInstructions-uconnect™ phone(If Equipped)

Refer to "uconnect™ phone" in Section 3.

OperatingInstructions-uconnect™studios (SatelliteRadio)(IfEquipped)

Refer to “uconnect™ studios (Satellite Radio)” in this section.

258UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

uconnect®studios(SATELLITERADIO)—IF EQUIPPED(REN/REQ/RER/RES/REURADOS ONLY)

Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.

NOTE:Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska.

SystemActivation

Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory-installed satellite radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including how to setup your on-line listening account. For further information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.

ElectronicSerialNumber/SiriusIdentification Number(ESN/SID)

Please have the following information available when calling:

1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.

To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:

ESN/SIDAccessWithREQ/RESRadios

With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259

Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on the radio to exit this screen.

ESN/SIDAccessWithREN/RERRadios

While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio faceplate.

Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen. All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.

ESN/SIDAccessWithREURadio

While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio faceplate.

Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.

Selectinguconnect®studios(Satellite)Mode

Press the SAT button until "SAT" appears in the display. A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode.

SatelliteAntenna

To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped). Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly on or above the antenna.

ReceptionQuality

Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons:

- The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle.

260UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage.

OperatingInstructions—uconnect®studios (Satellite)Mode

NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio.

SEEKButtons

Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection. Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it.

SCANButton(WhenEquipped)

Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN button a second time.

INFOButton—ExceptREURadio

Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the song title all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal display).

INFOButton—REURadio

Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261

RW/FF

Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows.

TUNEControl(Rotary)

Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.

MUSICTYPEButton—ExceptREURadio

Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.

Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type.

By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name.

If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type (Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.

MUSICTYPEButton—REURadio

Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from which you can make a selection. Once a selection is made, you can seek up or down or scan the channels and the radio will tune to the next station matching the selected format. There is no time-out for this screen. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the Music Type screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down, and scan will no longer be based on your selection.

262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SETUPButton

Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items:

- Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the Sirius subscription.

SETButton-ToSetthePushbuttonMemory

When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button. If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory.

You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.

Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding button number will display.

Buttons1-6

These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).

OperatingInstructions—uconnect® phone(If Equipped)

Refer to "uconnect®phone" in Section 3.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263

OperatingInstructions—VideoEntertainment System(VES) ^™ (IfEquipped)

Refer to separate "Video Entertainment System (VES)TM Guide."

CD/DVDMAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays.

5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high.

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service.

RADIOOPERATIONANDCELLULARPHONES

Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation.

264UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

CLIMATECONTROLS

ManualHeaterOnly

The controls for the heating/ventilation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain the desired interior conditions.

ClimateControls

ModeControl

The mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution as identified by the symbols.

81915f2a

Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.

Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer

air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

Floor

Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demist outlets with a small amount gh the defrost outlet.

Mix

Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at windshield. This setting is good for maintaining port while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-fan and temperature settings for best windshield side window defrosting.

BlowerControl

Use this control (center rotary knob) to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The fan speed increases as you move the control to the right from the OFF position.

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the "O" (Off) position.

TemperatureControl

Use this control (right rotary knob) to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures.

266UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

ManualHeatingandAirConditioningSystem—If Equipped

The controls for the heating/air conditioning and ventilation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions.

ClimateControls

The instrument panel features four airflow registers. Two registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument panel and two are located in the center of the instrument panel. These registers can be closed to partially block airflow, and they can be adjusted to direct airflow where the occupant desires.

ModeControl

The mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution as identified by the symbols.

81915f2a

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267

Panel

Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.

Bi-Level

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

Floor

Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demist outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet.

Mix

Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side window demist outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Defrost

Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use this mode with maximum fan and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost even if the fan switch is not in the A/C position. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.

BlowerControl

Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The fan speed increases as you move the control to the right from the OFF position.

TemperatureControl

Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures.

NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser: located in front of the radiator, for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

RecirculationControl

Press this button to choose between outside air intake or recirculation of the air inside the vehicle. A light will illuminate when you are in "Recirculation" mode. Only use the "Recirculation" mode to temporarily block out any outside odors, smoke, or dust and to cool the interior rapidly

upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather.

NOTE: Continuous use of the "Recirculation" mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

In cold or damp weather, the use of the "Recirculation" mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum defogging, select the Outside Air position.

NOTE: The "Recirculation" mode will not operate in the floor, mix or defrost modes.

AirConditioning

NormalOperation

Press this button to engage the air conditioning. A light will illuminate when the air conditioning system is engaged. Once the air conditioning is engaged, use a combination of the mode control, fan speed control, and temperature control to achieve your desired interior temperature.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.

270UNDERSTANDINGYOURINSTRUMENTPANEL

MAXA/C

For maximum cooling, select either the Panel or Bi-Level position using the mode control. Then, press the "A/C" and the "Recirculation" buttons so that both lights are illuminated, and set the temperature control to its coolest setting.

NOTE:

• Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor, mix or defrost modes.
• Refer to "Recirculation Control" in this section, for proper or extended use of this position.

OperatingTips

WindowFogging

Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it's rainy or humid. In most cases turning on the air-conditioning (pressing the snowflake button) will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort.

As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode.

Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows. Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.

SummerOperation

Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating. A 50% concentration is recommended. Refer to Fluids and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the proper coolant type.

When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer, additional engine cooling may be required. If this situation is encountered, operate the transmission in a lower gear to increase engine RPM, coolant flow and fan speed. When stopped in heavy traffic, it may be necessary to shift into NEUTRAL (N) and depress the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation to increase coolant flow and fan speed.

WinterOperation

When operating the system during the winter months, make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions.

VacationStorage

Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

■Starting Procedures....277

□Manual Transmission....277

□Automatic Transmission.... 277

□Normal Starting 277

☐Extreme Cold Weather (Below -20° F Or -29° C).... 278

□If Engine Fails To Start....278

□After Starting 280

■Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ..... 281

■Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . 2 8 1

□Shifting 282

□Downshifting.... 283

□Reverse Shifting 284

■Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ..... 285

□Key Ignition Park Interlock.... 285

□Brake/Transmission Interlock System ..... 286

□Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override.... 2 8 6

□Automatic Transmission With Overdrive.... 287

■ Four-Wheel Drive Operation (Command-Trac I® Or Rock-Trac®) — If Equipped 291

□Operating Instructions/Precautions ..... 291

□Shift Positions 293

□Shifting Procedure.... 294

■ Trac-Lok® Rear Axle — If Equipped ..... 295

■ Axle Lock (Tru–Lok®) — Rubicon Models .... 296

■Rear Axle Lock (Four-Wheel Drive Non-Rubicon Models) — If Equipped . . . . . . . 2 9 7

Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If Equipped.... 298

■On-Road Driving Tips.... 300

■Off-Road Driving Tips 300

□Side Step Removal — If Equipped ..... 3 0 0

□The Basics Of Off-Road Driving ..... 3 0 1

□When To Use 4L (Low) Range ..... 3 0 2

□Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation 302

□Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand ..... 3 0 3

□Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High Points).... 3 0 4

□Hill Climbing 307

□Driving Through Water 309

□After Driving Off-Road 312

■Power Steering....313

□Power Steering Fluid Check....3 1 4

■ Parking Brake 315

STARTING ANDOPERATING275

■Anti-Lock Brake System 316

Electronic Brake Control System 318

□Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) 319

□Traction Control System (TCS) 319

□Brake Assist System (BAS) 320

□Hill Start Assist (HSA) 321

□Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) 324

□Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ..... 3 2 5

□ESP/BAS Warning Light....331

□Trailer Sway Control (TSC) 3 3 2

■Tire Safety Information.... 3 3 3

□Tire Markings 333

□Tire Identification Number (TIN) 3 3 7

□Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 338

■Tires — General Information ..... 3 4 2

□Tire Pressure 342

□Tire Inflation Pressures 343

☐ Tire Pressures For High-Speed Operation ... 345

□Radial-Ply Tires 346

□Tire Spinning 346

□Tread Wear Indicators 347

□Life Of Tire 347

□ Replacement Tires 348

■Tire Chains 350

■ Tire Rotation Recommendations ..... 350

■ Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ..... 351

□Reformulated Gasoline 357
□Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends 357
□E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ..... 3 5 8
□MMT In Gasoline 358
□Materials Added To Fuel 359
□Fuel System Cautions 359
□Carbon Monoxide Warnings....360

■Adding Fuel 361

□Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)....361
□ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 363

■ Vehicle Loading 363

□Certification Label 363

■ Trailer Towing 365

□ Common Towing Definitions ..... 366
□Trailer Hitch Classification.... 368
□Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) 369
□ Trailer And Trailer Tongue Weight ..... 375
□Towing Requirements 376
□Towing Tips.... 381

■Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) 382

□ Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models ..... 382
□Towing – Four-Wheel Drive Models ..... 3 8 3

STARTINGPROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.

WARNING!

Donotleavechildrenoranimalsinsideparked vehiclesinhotweather.Interiorheatbuildupmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.

ManualTransmission

Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEU-TRAL, and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor.

Four-Wheel Drive Models Only

In 4L mode, this vehicle will start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor. This feature enhances off-road performance by allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to press the clutch pedal. The "4WD Indicator Light" will illuminate when the transfer case has been shifted into this mode.

AutomaticTransmission

Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range.

NormalStarting

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.

Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

TipStartFeature—AutomaticTransmissionOnly

Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will continue to run, but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running. If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

ExtremeColdWeather(below-20°For-29°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally-powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

IfEngineFailstoStart

WARNING!

- Neverpourfuelorotherflammableliquidsinto thethrottlebodyairinletopeninginanattemptto startthevehicle. This could result in a flashfire causing serious personal injury.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotattempttopushortowyourvehicletoget itstarted.Vehiclesequippedwithanautomatic transmissioncannotbestartedthisway.Unburned fuelcouldenterthecatalyticconverterand,once theenginehasstarted,igniteanddamagethe converterandvehicle.Ifthevehiclehasadischargedbattery,boostercablesmaybeusedto obtainastartfromaboosterbatteryorthebattery inanothervehicle.Thistypeofstartcanbedangerousifdoneimproperly.RefertoSection6of thismanualforproperjumpstartingprocedures andfollowthemcarefully.

Without Tip Start — Manual Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all

the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.

CAUTION!

Topreventdamagetothestarter, donotcrank the engine form more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.

If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly.

If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15-second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor, repeat the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedures.

With Tip Start — Automatic Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold Weather" procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the "Normal Starting" procedure.

CAUTION!

Topreventdamagetothestarter,wait10to15secondsbeforetryingagain.

AfterStarting

The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up.

WARNING!

Donotleavechildrenoranimalsinsideparked vehiclesinhotweather.Interiorheatbuildupmay causeseriousinjuryordeath.

ENGINEBLOCKHEATER—IFEQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. The engine block heater cord is found under the hood bundled in front of the battery tray.

WARNING!

Remembertodisconnectthecordbeforedriving. Damagetothe110-115VoltACelectricalcordcould causeelectrocution.

Use the heater when temperatures below 0° F ( -18° C) are expected to last for several days.

MANUALTRANSMISSION—IFEQUIPPED

WARNING!

Youorotherscouldbeinjuredifyouleavethe vehicleunattendedwithouthavingtheparking brakefullyapplied.Theparkingbrakeshouldalwaysbeappliedwhenthedriverisnotinthevehicle, especiallyonanincline.

CAUTION!

Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch.

NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is normal.

Shifting

Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal.

You should always use 1st gear when starting from a standing position if under heavy load or when pulling a trailer.

RecommendedVehicleShiftSpeeds

To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift speeds may not apply.

ManualTransmissionShiftSpeedsinMPH(KM/H)
Engine	Speeds	1 to 2	2 to 3	3 to 4	4 to 5	5 to 6
3.8L Accel.	15 (24)	24		(39)	34 (55)	47 (76)
	Cruise	10 (16)	19		27 (43)	37 (60)

Downshifting

Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.

WARNING!

Donotdownshiftforadditionalenginebrakingona slipperysurface.Thedrivewheelscouldlosetheir grip,andthevehiclecouldskid.

CAUTION!

When descending a hill, be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine whichcancausevalvedamage,and/orclutchdisc damage,eveniftheclutchpedalispressed.

MaximumRecommendedDownshiftSpeeds

CAUTION!
Failuretofollowthemaximumrecommendeddown-shiftingspeedsmaycausetheenginetooverspeed and/ordamagetheclutchdisc,eveniftheclutch pedalispressed.
ManualTransmissionDownshiftSpeedsinMPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection	6 to 5	5 to 4	4 to 3	3 to 2	2 to 1
Maximum Speed	80 (129)	70 (113)	50 (81)	30 (48)	15 (24)

ReverseShifting

To shift into REVERSE, bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Press the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to stop rotating. Beginning from the NEUTRAL position, move the shift lever in one quick, smooth motion straight across and into the REVERSE area (the driver will feel a firm “click” as the shifter passes the “knock-over”). Complete the shift by pulling the shift lever into REVERSE.

The “knock-over” prevents the driver from accidentally entering the REVERSE shift area and warns the driver that they are about to shift the transmission into REVERSE. Due to this feature, a slow shift to REVERSE can be perceived as a high shift effort.

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION—IFEQUIPPED

CAUTION!

Damagetothetransmissionmayoccurifthefollowingprecautionsarenotobserved:

• ShiftintoPARKonlyafterthevehiclehascometo acompletestop.
• ShiftintooroutofREVERSEonlyafterthe vehiclehascometoacompletestopandtheengine isatidlespeed.
• DonotshiftfromREVERSE,PARK,orNEUTRAL intoanyforwardgearwhentheengineisabove idlespeed.
• Beforeshiftingintoanygear,makesureyourfoot isfirmlyonthebrakepedal.

WARNING!

ItisdangeroustomovetheshiftleveroutofPARKor NEUTRALiftheenginespeedishigherthanidle speed. If yourfootisnotfirmlyonthebrakepedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift to gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

KeyIgnitionParkInterlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position. The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition switch must be turned to any other switch position (ACC, ON, or START) (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.

Brake/TransmissionInterlockManualOverride

Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override. The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with the key in the ON position and the brake pedal pressed. To operate the shift lock manual override, perform the following steps:

1. Turn the key to the ON position but do not start the engine.

2. Firmly set the parking brake.

3. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, carefully remove the shift lock manual override cover which is located on the PRNDL bezel, above the PARK position.

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Using the screwdriver, reach into the manual override opening. Press and hold the shift lock lever down.

Brake/TransmissionInterlockManualOverride

1. Press the shifter release button and shift into NEU-TRAL.

2. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used.

AutomaticTransmissionwithOverdrive

Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE (or from P or R to D) should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears.

ShiftLever

NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures ( -10° F ( -23° C) and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be briefly limited to only second gear operation. Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range.

PARK

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. Always apply the parking brake first, then place the shift lever in the PARK position.

WARNING!

• NeverusethePARKpositionasasubstitutefor theparkingbrake.Alwaysapplytheparking brakefullywhenparkedtoguardagainstvehicle movementandpossibleinjuryordamage.
• ItisdangeroustomovetheshiftleveroutofPARK orNEUTRALiftheenginespeedishigherthan theidlespeed.Ifyourfootisnotfirmlyonthe brakepedal,thevehiclecouldacceleratequickly forwardorinreverse.Youcouldlosecontrolofthe vehicleandhitsomeoneorsomething.Onlyshift intogearwhentheengineisidlingnormallyand whenyourrightfootisfirmlyonthebrakepedal.

REVERSE

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Use only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL

This range is used when vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with engine running. Engine may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle.

NOTE: Towing, coasting, or driving the vehicle for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in Section 5 and “Towing a Disabled Vehicle” in Section 6 of this manual.

OVERDRIVE

This range is used for most city and highway driving. The transmission contains an electronically-controlled fourth gear Overdrive, and will automatically shift from DRIVE to OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present:

• The shift lever is in DRIVE.
- The O/D OFF switch has not been activated.
- Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (48 km/h).

When frequent transmission shifting occurs while using Overdrive, such as when operating the vehicle under heavy load conditions (for example, in hilly terrain, strong head winds, or trailer towing), turning off overdrive will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

If the transmission overheats, a "HOTOIL" message will be displayed in the odometer and a chime will sound.

OverdriveOffSwitch

Overdrive can be locked out by pressing the O/D OFF switch located on the center console. The "O/D OFF Indicator Light" (on the switch) will illuminate to show that the switch has been activated. When the indicator light is on, Overdrive is locked out. Pressing the switch a second time restores the Overdrive function. The lockout feature is useful when towing a trailer or carrying a heavy load.

2 (Second)

This range is used for moderate grades and to assist braking on dry pavement or in mud and snow. The vehicle begins from a stop in low gear with automatic upshift to second gear. The vehicle will not shift into third gear.

1 (First)

This range is used for hard pulling at low speeds in mud, sand, snow, or on steep grades. The vehicle begins and stays in low gear with no upshift. This gear provides engine compression braking at low speeds.

CAUTION!

• BeforemovingtheshiftleveroutofPARK, you mustturntheignitionfromLOCKsothesteering wheelandshiftleverarereleased. Otherwise, damagetothesteeringcolumnorshiftlevercould result.
• Neverracetheenginewiththebrakesonandthe vehicleingear,andneverholdthevehicleonan inclinewithoutapplyingthebrakes.Thesepracticescanoverheatanddamagethetransmission.
• When "rocking" astuckvehiclebymovingbetweenDRIVEandREVERSE, donotspinthe wheelsfasterthan15mph(24km/h), ordrivetrain damagemayresult.

TorqueConverterClutch

A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in high gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during acceleration, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.

FOUR-WHEELDRIVEOPERATION(COMMAND-TRACI®ORROCK-TRAC®)-IFEQUIPPED

OperatingInstructions/Precautions

The transfer case provides four mode positions:

• 2H (Two-wheel drive high range)
• 4H (Four-wheel drive high range)
• N (Neutral)

• 4L (Four-wheel drive low range)

Four-WheelDriveShiftControls

The transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as hard-surfaced roads.

In the event that additional traction is required, the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simply moving the shift lever to one of these positions. The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components.

The "4WD Indicator Light" (located in the instrument cluster) alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and rear driveshafts are locked together. The light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position.

NOTE: Do not attempt to shift when only the front or rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer, and the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for a shift to take place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.

When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed will be approximately three times (four times for Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine.

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type, and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

WARNING!

Youorotherscouldbeinjuredifyouleavethe vehicleunattendedwiththetransfercaseintheN (Neutral)positionwithoutfirstfullyengagingthe parkingbrake. ThetransfercaseN(Neutral)position disengagesboththefrontandreadriveshaftfrom thepowertrain, andwillallowthevehicletomove regardlessofthetransmissionposition. Theparking brakeshouldalwaysbeappliedwhenthedriveris notinthevehicle.

ShiftPositions

For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below:

2HPosition

This range is used for normal street and highway driving on hard-surfaced roads.

This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range (4H) provides additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces and should not be used on wet or dry pavement.

The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position.

N(Neutral)Position

This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in Section 5 of this manual.

4LPosition

This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same

speed. This range (4L) provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

The “4WD Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4L position.

ShiftingProcedure

2Hto4Hor4Hto2H

Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion, shifts can be made up to 50 mph (80 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever.

4Hto4Lor4Lto4H

With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission. While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause with the transfer case in N (Neutral).

NOTE: Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).

WARNING!

Failuretoengageapositioncompletelycancause transfercasedamageorlossofpowerandvehicle control.Youcouldhaveaninjuryaccident.Donot drivethevehicleunlesssthetransfercaseisfully engaged.

TRAC-LOK®REARAXLE—IFEQUIPPED

The Trac-Lok ^® rear axle provides a constant driving force to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one driving wheel. If traction differs between the two rear wheels, the differential automatically proportions the usable torque by providing more torque to the wheel that has traction.

Trac-Lok ^® is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction.

Onvehiclesequippedwithalimited-slipdifferential,neverruntheenginewithonerearwheeloffthe ground.Thevehiclemaydrivethroughtherear wheelremainingonthegroundandcauseyoutolose controlofyourvehicle.

AXLELOCK(TRU-LOK®)—RUBICONMODELS

The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the lower switch bank (below the climate controls).

AxleLockSwitch

This feature will only activate when the following conditions are met:

• Key in ignition, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.
• Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.

To activate the system, press the bottom of the AXLE LOCK switch once to lock the rear axle only (the "Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light" will illuminate), press the bottom of the switch again to lock the front axle (the "Front Axle Lock Indicator Light" will illuminate). When the rear axle is locked, pressing the switch again will lock or unlock the front axle.

NOTE: The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked or unlocked.

To unlock the axles, press the top of the AXLE LOCK switch.

Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L (Low) range, or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.

REARAXLELOCK(FOUR-WHEELDRIVE NON-RUBICONMODELS)—IFEQUIPPED

The REAR AXLE LOCK switch is located on the lower switch bank (below the climate controls).

This feature will only activate when the following conditions are met:

• Key in ignition, vehicle in 4L (Low) range.
• Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.

To activate the system, press the REAR AXLE LOCK switch down to lock the rear axle (the "Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light" will illuminate); press the switch up to unlock the rear axle.

NOTE: The indicator lights will flash until the axle is fully locked or unlocked.

The rear axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L (Low) range, or the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.

ELECTRONICSWAYBARDISCONNECT—IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater front suspension travel in off-road situations.

This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch located on the lower switch bank (below the climate controls).

SwayBarSwitch

Press the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system. Press the switch again to deactivate the system. The "Sway Bar Indicator Light" (located in the instrument cluster) will illuminate when the bar is disconnected. The "Sway Bar Indicator Light" will flash during activation transition, or

when activation conditions are not met. The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in on-road mode during normal driving conditions.

WARNING!

Donotdisconnectthestabilizerbaranddriveon hard-surfacedroadsoratspeedsabove18mph (29km/h);youmaylosecontrolofthevehicle,which couldresultinserious injury. Thefrontstabilizerbar enhances vehicle stability and is necessary form maintaining control of the vehicle. Thesystem monitors vehiclespeed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at speed over 18mph (29km/h). This is indicated by a flashing or solid "Sway Bar Indicator Light." Once vehicles speed is reduced below 14mph (22km/h), the system will once again attempt to return to off-road mode.

To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4H or 4L (refer to "Four-Wheel Drive Operation" in this section) and press the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off-road position. The "Sway Bar Indicator Light" will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully disconnected.

NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences. This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned. This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side.

To return to on-road mode, press the SWAY BAR switch again.

WARNING!

Ifthestabilizer/swaybarwillnotreturntoon-road mode,vehiclestabilityisgreatlyreduced.Donot attempttodrivethevehicleover18mph(29km/h). Drivingfasterthan18mph(29km/h)maycauseloss ofcontrolofthevehicle,whichcouldresultin seriousinjury.Contactyourlocalauthorizeddealer forassistance.

ON-ROADDRIVINGTIPS

Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars.

An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.

OFF-ROADDRIVINGTIPS

SideStepRemoval—IfEquipped

NOTE: Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be removed to prevent damage.

1. Remove the two nuts from the bodyside.

1. Remove one bolt from the underside of the vehicle.

1. Remove the side step assembly.

TheBasicsofOff-RoadDriving

You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding. There are many types of surface conditions: hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on

your vehicle's steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases, there are no road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore, you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not. When on a trail, you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over.

CAUTION!

Neverparkyourvehicleoverdrygrassorother combustiblematerials.Theheatfromyourvehicle exhaustsystemcouldcauseafire.

WARNING!

Alwayswearyourseatbeltandfirmlytiedown cargo. Unsecuredcargocanbecomeprojectilesinan off-roadsituation.

WhentoUse4L(Low)Range

When off-road driving, shift into 4L (Low) for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep hills, and to increase low speed pulling power. This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines, or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4L (Low) range.

SimultaneousBrakeandThrottleOperation

Many off-road driving conditions require the simultaneous use of the brake and throttle (two-footed driving). When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects,

using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline.

DrivingInSnow, MudandSand

Snow

In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4L (Low) if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Overrevving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth, while still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a fresh "bite" and help maintain your momentum.

CAUTION!

Onicyorslipperyroads, donotdownshiftathigh engineRPMorvehiclespeeds, becauseenginebrakingmaycauseskiddingandlossofcontrol.

Mud

Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through. You should use second gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low) position to maintain your momentum. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before

entering any mud hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck.

Sand

Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure. When crossing soft, sandy spots in a trail, maintain your vehicle's momentum and do not stop. The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle's momentum. If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure.

CAUTION!

Reduced tire pressures may cause an unseating and total loss of air pressure. Toreducether is of tire unseating, while a reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

CrossingObstacles(RocksandOtherHigh Points)

While driving off-road, you will encounter many types of terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles. Before proceeding, review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong. Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle

forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object.

WARNING!

Crossingobstaclescancauseabruptsteeringsystem loadingwhichcouldcauseyoutoloosecontrolof yourvehicle.

UsingaSpotter

There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path. Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles. In these cases, have someone guide you over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and guide you through.

CrossingLargeRocks

When approaching large rocks, choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires. This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.

CAUTION!

• Neverattempttostraddlearockthatislarge enoughtostrikeyouraxlesorundercarriage.
• Neverattempttodriveoverarockwhichislarge enoughtocontactthedoorsills.

CrossingaRavine, Gully, Ditch, WashoutorRut

When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your

vehicle's mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently. You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45-degree angle.

WARNING!

Thereisanincreasedriskofrolloverwhencrossing anobstacle, atanyangle, withsteepsides.

CrossingLogs

To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be

on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.

CAUTION!

Donotattempttocrossalogwithagreaterdiameter thantherunninggroundclearanceorthevehiclewill becomehigh-centered.

GettingHigh-Centered

If you get hung up or high-centered on an object, get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off

of the high point when you let the vehicle down. You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object.

CAUTION!

Winchingorrockingthevehicleoffhardobjects increasestheriskofunderbodydamage.

HillClimbing

Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good understanding of your abilities and your vehicle's limitations. Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted. You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You should always climb hills straight up and down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle.

BeforeClimbingASteepHill

As you approach a hill, consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything looks good and you feel confident, shift the transmission into a lower gear with 4L (Low) engaged, and proceed with caution, maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill.

DrivingUpHill

Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control. If the front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle

slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you approach the crest of the hill, ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth. This will provide a fresh "bite" into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes.

WARNING!

Neverattempttoclimbahillatanangleorturn aroundonasteepgrade. Drivingacrossanincline increasestheriskofarollover, which may result in severe injury.

DrivingDownhill

Before driving down a steep hill, you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow, controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel confident in your ability to proceed, then make sure you are in 4L (Low) and proceed with caution. Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.

WARNING!

DonotdescendasteepgradeinNEUTRAL.Use vehiclebrakesinconjunctionwithenginebraking. Descendingagradetoofastcouldcauseyoutolose controlandbeseriouslyinjured.

DrivingAcrossanIncline

If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your vehicle's abilities. Driving across an incline places more weight on the downhill wheels, which increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover. Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down.

WARNING!

Drivingacrossaninclineincreasetheriskofa rollover,whichmayresultinsevereinjury.

IfYouStallorBegintoLoseHeadway

If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing

engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.

WARNING!

Iftheenginestallsoryouloseheadwayorcannot makeittothetopofasteephillorgrade,never attempttoturnaround.Todosomayresultin tippingandrollingthevehicle,whichmayresultin severeinjury.Alwaysbackcarefullystraightdowna hillinREVERSEgear.Neverbackdownahillin NEUTRALusingonlythevehiclebrakes.Never drivediagonallyacrossahill;alwaysdrivestraight upordown.

Driving Through Water

Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water. Water crossings should be avoided, if possible, and only be attempted when necessary in a safe, responsible manner. You should only drive through areas which are

310 STARTING AND OPERATING

designated and approved. You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment. You should know your vehicle's abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested water first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. Shift into first gear (manual transmission), or DRIVE (automatic transmission), with the transfer case in the 4L (Low) position and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed {3 to 5 mph (5 to 8 km/h) maximum} and light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through the crossing. After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.

CAUTION!

- Wateringestionintotheaxles,transmission,transfercase,engineorvehicleinteriorcanoccurifyou drivetoofastorthroughtoodeepofwater.Water cancausepermanentdamagetoengine,driveline orothervehiclecomponents,andyourbrakeswill belesseffectiveoncewetand/ormuddy.

- This vehicle is capable of crossing through water at a depth of 30 inches (76 cm) at speed, not greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). Wateringestion can occur causing damage to your vehicle.

BeforeYouCrossAnyTypeofWater

As you approach any type of water, you need to determine if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or

muddy waters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife, and you can recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the water depth, current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining the depth and the ability to safely cross.

CrossingPuddles, Pools, FloodedAreasorOther StandingWater

Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery. If you are able to determine you can safely cross, than proceed using the low and slow method.

CAUTION!

Muddywaterscanreducethecoolingsystemeffectivenessbydepositingdebrisontotheradiator.

CrossingDitches,Streams,ShallowRiversor OtherFlowingWater

Flowing water can be extremely dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water. Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow water, a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle's running ground clearance. You

should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle's running ground clearance. Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle downstream and out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle's body. Before you proceed, determine the speed of the current, the water's depth, approach angle, bottom condition and if there are any obstacles. Then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique.

WARNING!

Neverdrivethroughfastmovingdeepwater.Itcan pushyourvehicledownstream,sweepingitoutof control.Thiscouldputyouandyourpassengersat riskofinjuryordrowning.

AfterDrivingOff-Road

Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is

always a good idea to check for damage. That way you can get any problems taken care of right away and have your vehicle ready when you need it.

• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as required.
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the values specified in the Service Manual.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.

- After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as possible.

WARNING!

Abrasivematerialinanypartofthebrakesmaycause excessivewearorunpredictablebraking.Youmight nothavefullbrakingpowerwhenyouneeditto preventanaccident.Ifyouhavebeenoperatingyour vehicleindirtyconditions,getyourbrakeschecked andcleanedasnecessary.

- If you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for impacted material. Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation.

POWERSTEERING

The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers.

NOTE:

• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering

system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system.

WARNING!

Continuedoperationwithreducedpowersteering assistcouldposeasafetyrisktoyourselfandothers. Serviceshouldbeobtainedassoonaspossible.

CAUTION!

Prolongedoperationofthesteeringsystemattheend ofthesteeringwheeltravelwillincreasethesteering fluidtemperatureanditshouldbeavoidedwhen possible.Damagetothepowersteeringpumpmay occur.

PowerSteeringFluidCheck

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should only be

checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourpowersteering systemasthechemicalscandamageyourpower steeringcomponents.Suchdamageisnotcoveredby theNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

WARNING!

Fluidlevelshouldbecheckedonalevelsurfaceand withtheengineofftopreventinjuryfrommoving partsandtoensureaccuratefluidlevelreading.Do notoverfill.Useonlymanufacturer'srecommended powersteeringfluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in Section 7 for the correct fluid type.

PARKINGBRAKE

NOTE: This vehicle is not equipped with a self-adjusting parking brake system. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals.

To set the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as possible. When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will light. To release the parking brake, pull up slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever completely.

NOTE: The instrument cluster “Brake Warning Light” indicates only that the parking brake is applied. You must be sure the parking brake is fully applied before leaving the vehicle.

ParkingBrake

Be sure the parking brake is firmly set when parked, and the shift lever is in the PARK position (automatic transmission), or REVERSE, or first gear (manual transmission). When parking on a hill, you should apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK; otherwise, the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shifter out of PARK.

WARNING!

- Alwaysfullyapplytheparkingbrakewhenleavingyourvehicle,oritmayrollandcausedamage orinjury. Also,becertaintoleaveanautomatic transmissioninPARK,amanualtransmissionin REVERSEorfirstgear.Failureretodosomayallow thevehicletorollandcausedamageorinjury.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Neverleavechildrenaloneinavehicle.Leaving unattendedchildreninavehicleisdangerousfora numberofreasons.Achildorotherscouldbe seriouslyorfatallyinjured.Donotleavethekeyin theignition.Achildcouldoperatepowerwindows,othercontrols,ormovethevehicle.

When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.

ANTI-LOCKBRAKESYSTEM

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system operates with a separate

computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces.

All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type, and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer.

WARNING!

Significant over or under-inflation of tires, or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness.

The Anti-Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self-test at about 12 mph (20 km/h). If for any reason your foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h), this check will be delayed until 25 mph (40 km/h).

The Anti-Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self-test, and during an ABS stop, to provide the regulated hydraulic pressure. The motor pump makes a low humming noise during operation; this is normal.

During off-road use, loss of traction can temporarily defeat the system and cause the warning light to illuminate. Turn the ignition to LOCK and ON again to restore Anti-Lock Brake System function.

WARNING!

- PumpingoftheAnti-LockBrakeswilldiminish theireffectivenessandmayleadtoanaccident. Pumpingmakethestoppingdistancelonger.Just pressfirmlyonyourbrakepedalwhenyouneed toslowdownorstop.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent thenaturallawsof physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can they increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the extraction afforded.
• TheABScannotpreventaccidents,including thoseresultingfromexcessivespeedinturns, followinganothervehicletooclosely,orhydroplaning.Onlyasafe,attentive,andskillfuldriver canpreventaccidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

CAUTION!

The Anti-Lock Brake System missubjecttopossible detrimentale effect sofelectronic interference caused by improperly installed after market radios or telephones.

NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This is normal, indicating that the Anti-Lock Brake System is functioning.

ELECTRONICBRAKECONTROLSYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Program (ESP) and Trailer Sway Control (TSC). All of these systems work

together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions, and are commonly referred to as ESP.

Anti-LockBrakeSystem(ABS)

This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions. The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this manual for more information about ABS.

WARNING!

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent thenaturallawsof physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can they increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only as safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in reckless dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

TractionControlSystem(TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS

system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in either the "Partial Off" or "Full Off" modes. Refer to "ESP (Electronic Stability Program)" in this section.

BrakeAssistSystem(BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle's braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural law of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessives speed in turns, driving on every slipper surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in areckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety of others.

HillStartAssist(HSA)

The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel.

WARNING!

If the clutchpedal (manual transmission only) remainspressed during the application of the throttle, the HSA will disengage allowing the vehicle to roll down the incline. This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. To avoid this, donot apply throttle while pressing the clutchpedal until you are ready to release the clutch. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.

HSAActivationCriteria

The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate:

• Vehicle must be stopped
- Vehicle must be on an 8% or greater incline (3% for manual transmission equipped vehicles)

- Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

WARNING!

Theremaybesituationsonminorhills(i.e.,lessthan 8%),withaloadedvehicle,orwhilepullingatrailer wherethesystemwillnotactivateandslighttrolling mayoccur,whichcouldcauseacollisionwithanothervehicolorobject.Alwaysrememberthedriver isresponsibleforbrakingthevehicle.

The system will only work if the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match. For example, if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE (automatic transmission equipped vehicle), and the activation criteria are met, HSA will activate.

HSAonAutomaticTransmissionVehicles

The system will work in REVERSE, and all forward gears on vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission. The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL.

HSAonManualTransmissionVehicles

The system will work in REVERSE, forward gears, and NEUTRAL on manual transmission equipped vehicles. The system does not recognize NEUTRAL on manual vehicles, thus it will hold the vehicle on an incline for a short period while in NEUTRAL, regardless of clutch position. To prevent this, do not attempt to roll down a hill simply by putting the transmission in NEUTRAL and letting gravity act on the vehicle, as the HSA will prevent the vehicle from rolling. Instead, use the appropriate gear for moving in the desired direction.

TowingwithHSA

HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer.

WARNING!

- If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brakes switch. If so, when the brake pedal is released there may not been enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a hill and this could cause a collision with another vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration, manually activatethrailer brake prioritoreleasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- HSAisnotaparkingbrake. If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake, it will roll down the hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always remember to use the parking brakewhile parking on a hill, and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.

HSAOff

If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow this procedure:

1. Start with the engine off and vehicle in PARK (automatic transmission) or NEUTRAL with clutch out (manual transmission) with wheels straight. Apply parking brake on manual transmission vehicle.

2. Start the engine.

324STARTING ANDOPERATING

1. With the engine running, the brake applied, and the clutch out, rotate the steering wheel 180° counterclockwise from center.
2. Press the ESP OFF switch four times within twenty seconds.
3. Rotate the steering wheel 360° clockwise ( 180° clockwise from center).
4. Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON.
5. If the sequence was completed properly, the "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" will blink several times to confirm HSA is off.
   Steps 1-7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off HSA. Repeat steps 1-7 to re-enable HSA functionality.

ElectronicRollMitigation(ERM)

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver's steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle's speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneuvers.

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles.

NOTE: Anytime the ESP system is in the "Full Off" mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to ESP (Electronic Stability Program) for a complete explanation of the available ESP modes.

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP corrects for over/under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over/under steer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.

ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
- Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position.

The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster), starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If

the "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.

WARNING!

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) cannot prevent then natural law so of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speedinturns, driving on very slipper surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only as safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in reckless dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.

The ESP system has three available operating modes in 4H range. The system has one operating mode in 4L range. Two-wheel drive vehicles and four-wheel drive vehicles in 2H range have two operating modes.

4HRange(4WDModels)or2WDModels

On

This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4H and 2WD vehicles. Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4L range or NEUTRAL back to 4H range, the ESP system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most all driving situations. The ESP should only be turned to "Partial Off" or "Full Off" for specific reasons as noted below.

Partial Off

This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch. When in "Partial Off" mode, the TCS portion of ESP has been disabled and the "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" will be illuminated. All other stability features of

ESP function normally. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESP on again, momentarily press the ESP OFF switch. This will restore the normal “ESP On” mode of operation.

ESPOFFSwitch

NOTE: To improve the vehicle's traction when driving with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the "Partial Off" mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch. Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the "Partial Off" mode is overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion.

ESP Off (4H Range Only)

This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by pressing and holding the ESP OFF switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running. In this mode, all ESP and TCS stability features are turned off except for the "limited slip" feature described in the TCS section. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" will illuminate, and the "ESP OFF" message will appear in the odometer. Refer to

"Compass and Mini-Trip Computer — If Equipped" in Section 4 of this manual. To turn ESP on again, momentarily press the ESP OFF switch. This will restore the normal "ESP On" mode of operation.

NOTE:

• The ESP system will change to "Partial Off" mode if the vehicle speed exceeds 40 mph (64 km/h). After the vehicle speed is reduced below 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESP system will return to "Full Off" mode.
• The "ESP OFF" message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the PARK position from any position other than PARK, and then moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if the message was previously cleared.

WARNING!

With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESP and ERM system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. The "Full Off" ESP mode is intended for off-road use only.

4LRange(4WDModels)

ESP Off

This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4L range. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to 4L range, the ESP system will be in this mode. In 4L range, ESP and TCS, except for the “limited slip” feature described in the TCS section, are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (48 km/h). At 40 mph (48 km/h), the normal ESP stability function

returns but TCS remains off. When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph (40 km/h), the ESP system shuts off. The ESP is off at low vehicle speeds in 4L range so that it will not interfere with off-road driving, but the ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph (48 km/h). The "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" will always be illuminated in 4L range when ESP is off.

NOTE: The "ESP OFF" message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the PARK position from any position other than PARK, and then moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if the message was previously cleared.

WARNING!

With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ER Mare unavailable. In an emergency evasivemaneuver, the ESP and ERM system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. The "Full Off" mode is intended for off-road use only.

DisablingESPforModifiedVehicles(4WDModels Only)

Vehicles modified with larger tires and/or suspension lifts may experience early ESP activations as compared to a non-modified production vehicle depending on lift size, tire size, suspension changes and/or driving habits. If early ESP activations are experienced while driving a modified vehicle, the additional ability to permanently turn off ESP is available. A steering wheel/ESP button maneuver must be performed to permanently disable

ESP and defeat the functionality of the ESP switch. Repeating the procedure will return the system to normal ESP operation and restore ESP switch functionality allowing ESP "Partial" or "Off" modes.

WARNING!

With ESPinthepermanentdisablemode, enhanced vehiclestability offered by the ESPandERMsystems is unavailable. In an emergency evasivemaneuver, the ESPandERMsystem will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. This disabled mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only. Vehicle modifications requiring the owner to configure the vehicle in the ESP disabled mode, will seriously affect the vehicle's road worthiness and safety and may lead to loss of control and/or accident resulting in possible serious or fatal injuries.

The following procedure will disable (or re-enable) ESP functionality in the vehicle:

1. Shift the transfer case into the 4H range position.
2. Turn the steering wheel until it is centered and the wheels are pointed straight ahead.
3. Cycle the ignition key OFF to ON.
4. Wait approximately five seconds for the system bulb check.
5. Turn and hold the steering wheel one-half turn to the right (clockwise).
6. Press and hold the ESP OFF button for seven seconds.
7. Turn the steering wheel back to center, and turn and hold an additional one-half turn to the left (counterclockwise).
8. Press and hold the ESP OFF button for seven seconds.

1. Turn the steering wheel back to center.
2. Press and hold the ESP OFF button for seven seconds.
3. Cycle the ignition key to OFF.

After performing the ESP disable procedure correctly, "ESP OFF" will be displayed in the odometer for approximately 12 seconds each time the ignition is moved to ON. Repeating the ESP disable procedure will re-enable normal ESP operation.

ESP/BASWarningLight

ESP BAS

The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator. The “ESP/ BAS Warning Light” in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position. It should go out with the engine running.

If the "ESP/BAS Warning Light" comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system, or both. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles/kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

NOTE:

• The "ESP/BAS Warning Light" comes on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System will be ON even if it was previously turned off.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation.

TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations. Refer to "Trailer Towing" in Section 5 of this manual for more information on towing a trailer with your vehicle. When TSC is functioning, the "ESP/TCS Indicator Light" will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the "Partial Off" or "Full Off" modes.

WARNING!

IfTSCactivateswhiledriving,slowthevehicle down,stopathenearestsafelocation,andadjustthe trailerloadtoeliminatetrailersway.

TIRESAFETYINFORMATION

TireMarkings

054903773

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter "P" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters "LT" that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Tires designed to this standard have the letter "T" molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards, and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

TireSizingChart

EXAMPLE:

SizeDesignation:

P= Passenger Car tire size based on U.S. design standards"....blank...." = Passenger Car tire based on European design standardsLT= Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standardsT= Temporary spare tire31= Overall diameter in inches (in)

215= Section width in millimeters (mm)

65= Aspect ratio in percent (%)— Ratio of section height to section width of tire10.5= Section width in inches (in)

R= Construction code— "R"means radial construction— "D"means diagonal or bias construction

15= Rim diameter in inches (in)

EXAMPLE:

ServiceDescription:

95= Load Index— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H= Speed Symbol— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

LoadIdentification:

"....blank..." = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire

ExtraLoad(XL)= Extra load (or reinforced) tire

LightLoad= Light load tire

C,D,E= Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

MaximumLoad— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.

EXAMPLE:

DOTMAL9ABCD0301

DOT= Department of Transportation— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards, and is approved for highway use

MA= Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9= Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD= Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03= Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)—03 means the 3rd week.

01= Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)—01 means the year 2001— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

TirePlacardLocation(Two-DoorModels)

TirePlacardLocation(Four-DoorModels)

This placard tells you important information about the:

1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires.

Loading

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the "Vehicle Loading" section of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to "Vehicle Loading" in this section.

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs" on your vehicle's placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 - 750 = 650 lbs [295 kg]).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

NOTE:

• The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

811a4d11

WARNING!

Overloading of your tiresis dangerous. Overloading can cause it re failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Usetires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

TIRES—GENERALINFORMATION

TirePressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure:

Safety

WARNING!

• Under-inflationincreasestireflexingandcanresultinover-heatingandtirefailure.
• Over-inflationreducesatire'sabilitytocushion shock.Objectsontheroadandchuckholescan causedamagethatresultsintirefailure.
• Unequaltirepressurescancausesteeringproblems.Youcouldlosecontrolofyourvehicle.
• Over-inflatedorunder-inflatedtirescanaffect vehiclehandlingandcanfailsuddenly,resulting inlossofvehiclecontrol.
• Unequaltirepressuresfromonesideofthevehicletotheothercancausethevehicletodrifttotherightorleft.

Economy

Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.

RideComfortandVehicleStability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.

TireInflationPressures

TirePlacardLocation(Two-DoorModels)

TirePlacardLocation(Four-DoorModels)

Tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage, at least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.

CAUTION!

Afterinspectingoradjustingthetirepressure,alwaysreinstallthevalvestemcap.Thiswillprevent moistureanddirtfromenteringthevalvestem, whichcoulddamagetheTirePressureMonitoring Sensor.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always "cold tire inflation pressure." Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side wall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12° F ( 7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68° F ( 20° C) and the outside temperature = 32° F ( 0° C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F ( 7° C) for this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure buildup or your tire pressure will be too low.

TirePressuresforHigh-SpeedOperation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

Highspeeddrivingwithyourvehicleunderloadis dangerous.Theaddedstrainonyourtirescould causethemtofail.Youcouldhaveaseriousaccident. Donotdriveavehicleloadedtomaximumcapacityat continuousspeedsabove75mph(120km/h).

Combiningradialplytireswithothertypesoftires onyourvehiclewillcauseyourvehicletohandle poorly.Theinstabilitycouldcauseanaccident.Alwaysuseradialtiresinsetsoffour.Nevercombine themwithothertypesoftires.

Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your authorized dealer for radial tire repairs.

TireSpinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).

WARNING!

Fastspinningtirescanbedangerous. Forcesgenerated by excessive wheels speeds may cause damage or failure. Atire could explode and injuresome one. Donot spiny our vehicle's wheels faster than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and donot let any on near aspinning wheelnomatter what the speed.

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

055007576

1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.

LifeofTire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to:

• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven

WARNING!

Tiresandthesparetireshouldbereplacedaftersix years,regardlessoftheremainingtread.Failureto followthiswarningcanresultinsuddentirefailure. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveanaccidentresulting inseriousinjuryordeath.

Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline.

ReplacementTires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire. The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you refer to your original equipment or contact an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability.

WARNING!

• Donotuseatire, wheelsizeorratingotherthan thatspecifiedforyourvehicle. Some combinations of unapprovedtiresandwheelsmaychangesuspensiondimensionsandperformancecharacteristics, resultinginchangestosteering, handling, and brakingofyourvehicle. This can cause unpredictablehandlingandstresstosteeringandsuspensioncomponents. You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheelsizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Neveruseatirewithasmallerloadindexor capacity,otherthanwhatwasoriginallyequipped onyourvehicle.Usingatirewithasmallerload indexcouldresultintireoverloadingandfailure. Youcouldlosecontrolandhaveanaccident.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Failuretoequipyourvehiclewithtireshaving adequatespeedcapabilitycanresultinsuddentire failureandlossofvehiclecontrol.

CAUTION!

Replacingoriginaltireswithtiresofadifferentensize mayresultinfalsespeedometerandodometerreadings.

(Continued)

Install chains on rear tires only. Tire chains may be installed on all models except the Sahara and Rubicon. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage and excessive tire and chain wear:

• Use chains on P225/75R16 tires only. P255/75R17, P255/70R18, and LT255/75R17 tires do not provide adequate clearance.
• Use SAE class "S" tire chains or traction devices only.
• Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain manufacturer.
• Follow tire chain manufacturer's instructions for mounting chains.
• Install chains snugly and tighten after 0.6 mile (1 km) of driving.
• Donotexceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

- Drive cautiously, avoiding large bumps, potholes and extreme driving maneuvers.

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates, and develop irregular wear patterns.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed.

The suggested rotation method is the "forward-cross" shown in the following diagram.

055703771

TireRotation

TIREPRESSUREMONITORSYSTEM(TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three-hour period. Referto"Tires—GeneralInformation"inthissectionforinformationonhowtoproperly inflatethevehicle'stires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven; this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason, including low temperature effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn

off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended cold placard pressure. Once the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to be turned OFF. The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) air pressure of 35 psi (241 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68° F ( 20° C) and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi (207 kPa), a temperature drop to 20° F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi (207 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.

CAUTION!

- TheTPMShasbeenoptimizedfortheoriginal equipmenttiresandwheels.TheTPMSpressures have been established for the tiresize equipped on your vehicle. Undesirablesystemoperation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the namesize, type, and/or style. After market wheels can cause sensor damage. Donot use aftermarket tiresealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Afterinspectingoradjustingthetirepressure, alwaysreinstallthevalvestemcap.Thiswill preventmoistureanddirtfromenteringthevalve stem,whichcoulddamagetheTirePressureMonitoringSensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, nor to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light."

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire.

BaseSystem

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain the proper pressure.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the following components:

• Receiver Module
  • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
  • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light

A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires. A low spare tire will not cause the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" to illuminate or the chime to sound.

The "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible, check the

inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle's recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this information.

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and will remain on solid when a system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios:

1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors.

2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals.

3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

NOTE:

- If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire, the next ignition key cycle will still show the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" to be ON, and a chime to sound. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) will turn

STARTING AND OPERATING

OFF the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light" as long as none of the road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold.

- If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire. The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure. If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn ON. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the

vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the "Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-tale Light" will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

GeneralInformation

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following conditions:

• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses:

United States K R 5 S 1 2 0 1 2 3

Canada 2671-S120123

FUELREQUIREMENTS

All engines are designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use of premium gasoline is not recommended,

as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.

Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage, and immediate service is required.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.

Over 40 auto manufacturer's worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC specifications if they are available.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as "Reformulated Gasoline."

Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates, and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoline. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components.

Gasoline/OxygenateBlends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions. Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle.

CAUTION!

DONOTusegasolinescontainingMethanol.Useof theseblendsmayresultinstartinganddrivability problemsandmaydamagecriticalfuelsystemcomponents.

Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it does not have the negative effects of Methanol.

E-85UsageInNon-FlexFuelVehicles

Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle's warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• operate in a lean mode
- OBD II "Malfunction Indicator Light" on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
- increased risk for fuel system component corrosion

To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E-85 perform the following:

• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
• change the engine oil and oil filter
- disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory

More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E-85 fuel.

MMTInGasoline

MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane number. Gasoline blended with MMT offers no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT has shown to reduce sparkplug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your

vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer if the gasoline contains MMT.

It is even more important to look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States.

MMT is prohibited in Federal and California-reformulated gasoline.

MaterialsAddedToFuel

All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional detergents or other additives are not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel.

FuelSystemCautions

CAUTION!

Followtheseguidelinestomaintainyourvehicle's performance:

• The useofleadedgasolineisprohibitedbyFederallaw.Usingleadedgasolinecanimpairengine performance,anddamagetheemissioncontrol system.
• Anout-of-tuneengine, or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or somelights smoke, you're in e may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Theuseoffueladditiveswhicharenowbeing soldasoctaneenhancersisnotrecommended. Mostoftheseproductscontainhighconcentra-tionsofmethanol.Fuelsystemdamageorvehicle performanceproblemsresultingfromtheuseof suchfuelsoradditivesisnottheresponsibilityof themanufacturer.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

CarbonMonoxideWarnings

WARNING!

Carbonmonoxide(CO)inexhaustgasesisdeadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:

- Donotinhaleexhaustgases. They contain carbon monoxide, acolorless and odorless gas which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as agarage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engineer running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running form more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Guardagainstcarbonmonoxidewithproper maintenance.Havetheexhaustsysteminspected everytimethevehicleisraised.Haveanyabnormalconditionsrepairedpromptly.Untilrepaired, drivewithallsidewindowsfullyopen.
• Keeptheswinggateclosedwhendrivingyour vehicletopreventcarbonmonoxideandother poisonousexhaustgasesfromenteringthevehicle.

ADDINGFUEL

FuelFillerCap(GasCap)

The gas cap is located on the driver's side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle.

FuelFillerCap

CAUTION!

• Damagetothefuelsystemoremissioncontrol systemcouldresultfromusinganimproperfuel cap(gascap).Apoorlyfittingcapcouldletimpuritiesintothefuelsystem.Also,apoorlyfitting aftermarketcapcancausethe"MalfunctionIndicatorLight(MIL)"toilluminate,duetofuelvapors escapingfromthesystem.
• Toavoidfuelspillageandoverfilling, donot "top off" thefueltankafterfilling.

WARNING!

- Neverhaveanysmokingmaterialslitinornear thevehiclewhenthegascapisremovedorthe tankisfilled.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Neveraddfuelwhentheengineisrunning. This is inviolationofmoststateandfederalfireregulationsandwillcausetheMILtoturnon.
• Afiremayresultifgasolineispumpedintoa portablecontainerthatisinsideofavehicle.You couldbeburned.Alwaysplacegascontaineron thegroundwhilefilling.

NOTE:

• When the fuel nozzle "clicks" or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.

After fuel has been added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. If the system detects a malfunction, the "gASCAP" message will display in the odometer display. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem persists, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.

VEHICLELOADING

CertificationLabel

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver's side door or B-Pillar.

This label contains the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this label and indicates the month, day, and hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.

GrossVehicleWeightRating(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options, trailer tongue weight, and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited, so GVWR, and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.

GrossAxleWeightRating(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle's GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires, or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components, sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability, does not necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.

TireSize

The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

RimSize

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.

InflationPressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

CurbWeight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added.

Loading

The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded, but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear, or rear to front, as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes operate.

CAUTION!

DonotloadyourvehicleanyheavierthantheGVWR orthemaximumfrontandrearGAWR.Ifyoudo, partsonyourvehiclecanbreak,oritcanchangethe wayyourvehiclehandles.Thiscouldcauseyouto losecontrol.Also,overloadingcanshortenthelifeof yourvehicle.

TRAILERTOWING

In this section, you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible.

To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this Owner's Manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

The following trailer towing-related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information:

GrossVehicleWeightRating(GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and trailer tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.

GrossTrailerWeight(GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" condition. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully-loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

GrossCombinationWeightRating(GCWR)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination.

NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a driver.

GrossAxleWeightRating(GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.

WARNING!

It is important that you donot exceed them maximum frontorrear GAWR. Adangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident.

TrailerTongueWeight(TW)

The trailer tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.

FrontalArea

The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer.

TrailerSwayControl—IfEquipped

The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue. It typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.

Weight-CarryingHitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle. This kind of hitch is the most popular on the market today and is commonly used to tow small and medium-sized trailers.

Weight-DistributingHitch

A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. It is typically used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturers' directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds, and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight-distributing (load-equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier tongue weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.

WARNING!

• Animproperlyadjustedweight-distributinghitch systemmayreducehandling,stability,braking performance,andcouldresultinanaccident.
• Weight-DistributingHitchSystemsmaynotbe compatiblewithSurgeBrakeCouplers.Consult withyourhitchandtrailermanufacturerora reputableRecreationalVehicledealerforadditionalinformation.

TrailerHitchClassification

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) chart for the Max. GTW towable for your given drivetrain.

TrailerHitchClassificationDefinitions
ClassMax.TrailerHitchIndustryStandards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty	3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty	5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty	10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.

TrailerTowingWeights(MaximumTrailerWeightRatings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.

Engine/Transmission	AxleModel	GCWR	(Gross CombinedWt. Rating)	FrontalAreaMax	GTW (GrossTrailer Wt.)	Max.Trailer TongueWt. (SeeNote)
3.8L/Manual	3.21 Two-Door X Model (4WD)		5,049 lbs (2 290 kg)	25 sq ft (2.32 sq m)	1,000 lbs (453 kg)	100 lbs (45 kg)
3.8L/Manual	3.73 Two-Door X Model (4WD)		6,049 lbs (2 744 kg)	25 sq ft (2.32 sq m)	2,000 lbs (907 kg)	200 lbs (91 kg)
3.8L/Automatic	3.73 Two-Door X Model (4WD)		6,051 lbs (2 745 kg)	25 sq ft (2.32 sq m)	2,000 lbs (907 kg)	200 lbs (91 kg)

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to the "Tire Safety Information" section in this manual.

TrailerandTrailerTongueWeight

Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severelyside-to-side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents.

057003767

Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The trailer tongue weight.
- The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factory-installed options, or authorized dealer-installed options, must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard in the "Tire Safety Information" section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.

TowingRequirements

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended:

NOTE: Trailer towing requires special rear axle lubricant. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in Section 7 for the correct fluid type.

CAUTION!

- Avoidtowingatrailerforthefirst500miles (805km)ofvehicleoperation.Doingsomaydamageyourvehicle.

WARNING!

Impropertowingcanleadtoaninjuryaccident. Followtheseguidelinestomakeyourtrailertowing assafeaspossible:

- Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. Whentrailing cargothatis not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have an accident.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Whenhaulingcargoortowingatraler, donot overloadyourvehicleortrailer. Overloading can causealossofcontrol, poor performanceordamagetothebrakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassisstructureortires.
• Safetychainsmustalwaysbeusedbetweenyour vehicleandtrailer.Alwaysconnectthechainsto theframeorhookretainersofthevehiclehitch. Crossthechainsunderthetrailertongueand allowenoughslackforturningcorners.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Vehicleswithtrailersshouldnotbeparkedona grade. Whenparking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK. With a manual transmission, shift the transmission into first gear. And with four-wheel-drive vehicles, makes sure the transfcase is not in N (Neutral). Always, block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
  • GCWRmustnotbeexceeded.
• Totalweightmustbedistributedbetweenthetow vehicleandthetrailersuchthatthefollowingfour ratingsarenotexceeded:

1.GVWR
2.GTW
3.GAWR

(Continued)

378 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!(Continued)

1. Tongueweighitratingforthetrailerhitchutilized (Thisrequirementmaylimittheabilitytoalways achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongueweight as a percentage of total trailer weight).

TowingRequirements—Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire.
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to "Tires-General Information" in this section for proper tire inflation procedures.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to "Tires-General Information" in this section for the proper inspection procedure.

• When replacing tires, refer to "Tires–General Information" in this section for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.

TowingRequirements—TrailerBrakes

- Do notinterconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury.

• An electronically-actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge-actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighsmorethan 1,000 lbs (454 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to this could lead to accelerated brakeling wear, higher brake pedaleffort, and longer stopping distances.

WARNING!

• Donotconnecttrailerbrakestoyourvehicle's hydraulicbrakelines.Itcanoverloadyourbrake systemandcauseittofail.Youmightnohave brakeswhenyouneedthemandcouldhavean accident.
• Towinganytrailerwillincreaseyourstopping distance.Whentowing,youshouldallowforadditionalspacebetweenyourvehicleandthevehicleinfrontofyou.Failurertodosocouldresult inanaccident.

TowingRequirements—TrailerLights&Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package will include a four-pin wiring harness. Use a factory-approved trailer harness and connector.

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector. Refer to the following illustration.

057003766

Four-PinConnector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic.

If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing, all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage.

AutomaticTransmission

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the "O/D OFF" feature should be selected.

NOTE: Using "O/D OFF" while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking.

The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals.

NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing.

O/DOff

To reduce the potential for automatic transmission overheating, select the "O/D OFF" feature when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to DRIVE position 2 on more severe grades. Refer to "Automatic Transmission" in this section.

ElectronicSpeedControl—IfEquipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed.
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.

CoolingSystem

To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:

• Highway Driving
  Reduce speed.

- Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.

RECREATIONAL TOWING(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

CAUTION!

Frontorrearwheelliftsshouldnotbeused.Internal damagetothetransmissionortransfercasewilloccur ifafrontorrearwheelliftisusedwhenrecreational towing.

Towing-Two-WheelDriveModels

RecreationaltowingisallowedONLYifthereardrive-shaftisremoved.Seeyourauthorizeddealerorreferto theServiceManual.Towing with the rear wheels on the ground while the driveshaft is connected can result in severe transmission damage.

Towing-Four-WheelDriveModels

NOTE: The transfer case must be shifted into N (Neutral), automatic transmission must be shifted into PARK, and manual transmission must be placed in gear (not in NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.

ShiftingIntoNeutral(N)

WARNING!

Youorotherscouldbeinjuredifyouleavethe vehicleunattendedwiththetransfercaseintheN (Neutral)positionwithoutfirstfullyengagingthe parkingbrake. ThetransfercaseN(Neutral)position disengagesboththefrontandreadriveshaftsfrom thepowertrainandwillallowthevehicletomove, evenifthetransmissionisinPARK. Theparking brakeshouldalwaysbeappliedwhenthedriveris notinthevehicle.

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing.

CAUTION!

Itisnecessarytofollowthesestepstobecertainthat thetransfercaseisfullyinN(Neutral)beforerecreationaltowingtopreventdamagetointernalparts.

1. Turn the engine off.
2. Press the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
4. Shift the transfer case lever into N (Neutral).
5. Start the engine.
6. Shift the automatic transmission into DRIVE or the manual transmission into gear.

1. Release the brake pedal and ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
2. Turn the engine off and turn the ignition switch to the ACC position.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle with the tow bar.
6. Release the parking brake.
7. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and secure it away from the negative battery post.

CAUTION!

DamagetothetransmissionmayoccurifthetransmissionisshiftedintoPARKwiththetransfercaseinN(Neutral)andtheengine running.WiththetransfercaseinN(Neutral)ensurethattheengineisoff prioritoshiftingthetransmissionintoPARK(referto steps 8 – 9 above).

ShiftingOutofNeutral(N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage.

1. Turn the engine off.
2. Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
3. Shift the transfer case lever into the desired position.

4. Start the engine.

5. Shift the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release the clutch on manual transmissions.

NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case N (Neutral) on automatic transmission-equipped vehicles, turning the engine off may be required to avoid gear clash.

CAUTION!

- Donotuseabumper-mountedclamp-ontowbar onyourvehicle.Thebumperfacebarwillbe damaged.

WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

■Hazard Warning Flasher 388 □Preparations For Jacking 390
■If Your Engine Overheats.... 388 □Jacking Instructions.... 391
■Jacking And Tire Changing 389 ■Jump-Starting 394
□Jack Location.... 390 ■ Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped .... 396
□Spare Tire Stowage 390 ■ Towing A Disabled Vehicle 397

388WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls.

Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.

This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.

If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.

NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery.

IFYOURENGINEOVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmission into NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.

CAUTION!

Drivingwithahotcoolingsystemcoulddamage yourvehicle.IfthetemperaturegaugereadsHOT (H),pulloverandstopthevehicle.Idlethevehicle withtheairconditionerturnedoffuntilthepointer dropsbackintothenormalrange.Ifthepointer remainsonHOT(H),andyouhearcontinuous chimes,turntheengineoffimmediately,andcallfor service.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system.

JACKINGANDTIRECHANGING

WARNING!

• Gettingunderajacked-upvehicleisdangerous. Thevehiclecouldslipoffthejackandfallonyou. Youcouldbecrushed.Nevergetanypartofyour bodyunderavehiclethatisonajack.Ifyouneed togetunderaraisedvehicle,takeittoaservice centerwhereitcanberaisedonalift.
• Thejackisdesignedtouseasatoolforchanging tiresonly.Thejackshouldnotbeusedtoliftthe vehicleforservicepurposes.Thevehicleshould bejackedonafirmlevelsurfaceonly.Avoidiceor slipperyareas.

390WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

JackLocation

The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear storage compartment. Refer to "Storage" in Section 3 of this manual.

JackStorage

SpareTireStowage

To remove the spare tire from the carrier, remove the tire cover, if equipped, and remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench turning them counterclockwise.

NOTE: If you have added aftermarket accessories to the spare tire mounted carrier, it cannot exceed a gross weight of 50 lbs (23 kg) including the weight of the spare tire.

PreparationsForJacking

1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas.

WARNING!

Donotattempttochangeatireonthesideofthe vehicleclosetomovingtraffic.Pullfarenoughoff theroadtoavoidbeinghitwhenoperatingthejack orchangingthewheel.

1. Set the parking brake.
2. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or a manual transmission into REVERSE.
3. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
4. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

1. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

JackingInstructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow the set of receiving warning to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

• Alwaysparkonafirm, levelsurfaceasfarfrom theedgeoftheroadwayaspossiblebeforeraising thevehicle.
• Blockthewheeldiagonallyoppositethewheelto beraised.
• Settheparkingbrakefirmlyandsetanautomatic transmissioninPARK;amanualtransmissionin REVERSE.
• Neverstartorruntheenginewiththevehicleona jack.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• Donotletanyonesitinthevehiclewhenitisona jack.
• Donotgetunderthevehiclewhenitisonajack.
• Onlyusethejackinthepositionsindicatedand forliftingthisvehicleduringatirechange.
• Ifworkingonorneararoadway,beextremely carefulofmotortraffic.
• Toassurethatsparetires,flatorinflated,are securelystowed,sparesmustbestowedwiththe valvestemfacingtheground.
  • TurnontheHazardWarningflasher.

JackWarningLabel

1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from the stored location.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Connect the jack handle driver to the extension, then to the lug wrench.
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the vehicle. Place the jack under the axle tube, as shown. Do notraisethevehicleuntilyouaresurethejackisfully engaged.

JackingLocations

060505249

1 — Rear Jacking Location 2 — Front Jacking Location

1. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability.

WARNING!

Raisingthevehiclehigherthannecessarycanmake thevehiclelessstableandcauseanaccident.Itcould slipoffthejackandhurtsomeonearit.Raisethe vehicleonlyenoughtoremovethetire.

1. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
2. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
3. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The correct

394WHATODOINEMERGENCIES

wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs (130 N·m). If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station.

1. Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks.

WARNING!

Aloosetireorjack, thrownforwardinacollisionor hardstop, couldendangertheoccupantsofthevehicle. Alwaysstowthejackpartsandthesparetirein theplacesprovided.

1. Secure the tire, jack, and tools in their proper locations.

JUMP-STARTING

If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be

dangerous if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.

WARNING!

• Batteryfluidisacorrosiveacidsolution;donot allow batteryfluidtocontacteyes,skinorclothing.Donotleanoverabatterywhenattaching clampsorallowtheclampstotoucheachother.If acidsplashesinyoureyesoronskin,flushthe contaminatedareaimmediatelywithlargequantitiesofwater.
• Abatterygenerateshydrogengaswhichisflammableandexplosive.Keepflamesorsparksaway fromtheventholes.

• Donotuseaboosterbatteryoranyotherbooster sourcethathasagreaterthan12Voltsystem(i.e., donotusea24Voltpowersource).

• Remove all metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets which might make an unintended electrical contact.

• Park the booster vehicle within cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles, shift the automatic transmission into PARK, or the manual transmission into NEUTRAL, and turn the ignition to LOCK.
• Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads.
• Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of the same cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery.

WARNING!

Donotpermitvehiclestotoucheachotherasthis couldestablishagroundconnectionandpersonal injurycouldresult.

1. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have a good contact on the engine.
2. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
3. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.

WARNING!

Anyprocedureotherthanabovecouldresultin:

• Personalinjurycausedbyelectrolytesquirtingout thebatteryvent.
• Personalinjuryorpropertydamageduetobattery explosion.
• Damagetothechargingsystemofthebooster vehicleoroftheimmobilizedvehicle.
• You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing ortowing.
• Donotconnectthecabletothenegativepostofthe dischargebattery. Theresultingelectricalspark couldcausethebatterytoexplode.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

- Duringcoldweatherwhentemperaturesarebelowthefreezingpoint,electrolyteinadischarged batterymayfreeze.Donotattemptjumpstarting becausethebatterycouldruptureorexplode.The batterytemperaturemustbebroughtupabovethe freezingpointbeforeattemptingajump-start.

EMERGENCYTOWHOOKS—IFEQUIPPED

If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they are mounted in the front and the rear.

NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Chainsarenotrecommendedforfreeingastuck vehicle.chainsmaybreak,causingseriousinjury ordeath.
• Standclearofvehicleswhenpullingwithtow hooks.Towstrapsandchainsmaybreak,causing seriousinjury.

CAUTION!

Towhooksareforemergencyuseonly,torescuea vehiclestrandedoffroad.Donotusetowhooksfor towtruckhookuporhighwaytowing.Youcould damageyourvehicle.Towstrapsarerecommended whentowingthevehicle,chainsmaycausevehicle damage.

TOWINGADISABLEDVEHICLE

The manufacturer recommends towing with all four wheels OFFthe ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the vehicle raised and the other end on a towing dolly.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

■Engine Compartment - 3.8L ..... 4 0 1

■Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . 4 0 2

□Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 402

■Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Programs.... 4 0 3

■Replacement Parts 404

■Dealer Service 405

■Maintenance Procedures....405

□Engine Oil 406

□Engine Oil Filter 408

□Engine Air Cleaner Filter 409

□Maintenance-Free Battery 409

□Air Conditioner Maintenance....410

□Body Lubrication.... 4 1 1

□Windshield Wiper Blades 412

□ Adding Washer Fluid 412

□Exhaust System 413

□Cooling System 416

400MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

□Brake System 421

□Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . 4 2 3

□Hydraulic Clutch Fluid — Manual Transmission.... 4 2 6

□Manual Transmission — If Equipped ..... 4 2 6

□Transfer Case — If Equipped ..... 4 2 6

□Front/Rear Axle Fluid 427

□Maintenance After Off-Road Driving ..... 4 2 8

□Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion.... 4 2 8

■Fuses 436

□Totally Integrated Power Module ..... 4 3 6

■Vehicle Storage 4 4 2

■ Replacement Bulbs 443

■Bulb Replacement 4 4 4

□Headlamp 444

□Front Park/Turn Signal 4 4 5

□Front Side Marker 4 4 5

□Front Fog Lamp 445

☐Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamp 4 4 6

□Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) 4 4 6

■ Fluid Capacities 447

■Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ..... 4 4 8

□Engine 448

□Chassis 449

ENGINECOMPARTMENT-3.8L

1 — Integrated Power Module 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

2 — Battery 8 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

3 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 9 — Air Cleaner Filter

4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap

5 — Engine Oil Dipstick 11 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

ONBOARDDIAGNOSTICSYSTEM—OBDII

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• ProlongeddrivingwiththeMILoncouldcause furtherdamagetotheemissioncontrolsystem.It couldalsoaffectfueleconomyanddrivability.The vehiclemustbeservicedbeforeanyemissions testscanbeperformed.
• IftheMILisflashingwhiletheengineisrunning, severecatalyticconverterdamageandpowerloss willsoonoccur.Immediateserviceisrequired.

LooseFuelFillerCapMessage

After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or damaged. A "gASCAP" message will be displayed in the odometer. Tighten the gas cap until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened. Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off. If the problem persists,

the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off.

EMISSIONSINSPECTIONANDMAINTENANCE PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not in the engine is running, and that the OBD II is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently

serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over.
4. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.

404MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

1. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen:

a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is notready and you should not proceed to the I/M station.

b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is notready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running.

REPLACEMENTPARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer's warranty.

DEALERSERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

Youcanbebadlyinjuredworkingonorarounda motorvehicle.Onlydoserviceworkforwhichyou havetheknowledgeandtheproperequipment.If youhaveanydoubtaboutyourabilitytoperforma servicejob,takeyourvehicletoacompetentmechanic.

MAINTENANCEPROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed maintenance schedule, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!

- Failuretoproperlymaintainyourvehicleorperformrepairsandservicewhennecessarycould resultinmorecostlyrepairs,damagetoother componentsornegativelyimpactvehicleperformance.Immediatelyhavepotentialmalfunctions examinedbyanauthorizedChryslerLLCdealer-shiporqualifiedrepaircenter.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

- Yourvehiclehasbeenbuiltwithimprovedfluids thatprotecttheperformanceanddurability of yourvehicleandalsoallowextendedmaintenance intervals.Donotusechemicalflushesinthese componentsasthechemicalscandamageyour engine,transmission,powersteeringorairconditioning.SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNew VehicleLimitedWarranty.Ifaflushisneeded becauseofcomponentmalfunction,useonlythe specifiedfluidfortheflushingprocedure.

EngineOil

CheckingOilLevel

To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle's engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding 1 U.S. Quart (0.95L) of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines.

CAUTION!

Overfillingorunderfillingthecrankcasewillcause aerationorlossofoilpressure.Thiscoulddamage yourengine.

ChangeEngineOil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for information on this system.

NOTE: Undernocircumstances should doil change intervalsexceed6,000 miles (10000 km) or six months, whichever occurs first.

EngineOilSelection

For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.

AmericanPetroleumInstitute(API)EngineOil IdentificationSymbol

This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourengineoilasthe chemicalscandamageyourengine.Suchdamageis notcoveredbytheNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

408MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

EngineOilViscosity(SAEGrade)

SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this section.

Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number, should not be used.

SyntheticEngineOils

Synthetic engine oils can be used if the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed.

MaterialsAddedtoEngineOils

The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.

Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.

EngineOilFilter

The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change.

EngineOilFilterSelection

All of the manufacturer's engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended.

EngineAirCleanerFilter

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Theaircleanercanprovideprotectioninthecaseof enginebackfire.Donotremovetheaircleanerunless itisnecessaryforrepairormaintenance.Makesure thatnooneisneartheenginecompartmentbefore startingthevehiclewiththeaircleanerremoved. Failuretodosocanresultinseriouspersonalinjury.

EngineAirCleanerFilterSelection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR ^® engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.

Maintenance-FreeBattery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!

Batteryposts,terminals,andrelatedaccessoriescontainleadandleadcompounds.Alwayswashhands afterhandlingthebattery.

CAUTION!

Itisessentialwhenreplacingthecablesonthe batterythatthepositivecableisattachedtothe positivepostandthenegativecableisattachedtothe negativepost.Batterypostsaremarked(+)positive andnegative(-)andareidentifiedonthebattery case.Also,ifa"fastcharger"isusedwhilethebattery isinthevehicle,disconnectbothvehiclebattery cablesbeforeconnectingthechargertothebattery. Donotusea"fastcharger"toprovidestarting voltage.

AirConditionerMaintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourairconditioning systemasthechemicalscandamageyourairconditioningcomponents.Suchdamageisnotcoveredby theNewVehicleLimitedWarranty.

WARNING!

• Useonlyrefrigerantsandcompressorlubricants approvedbythemanufacturerforyourairconditioningsystem.Someunapprovedrefrigerantsare flammableandcanexplode,injuringyou.Other unapprovedrefrigerantsorlubricantscancause thesystemtofail,requiringcostlyrepairs.Referto Section3oftheWarrantyInformationBookfor furtherwarrantyinformation.
• The airconditioningsystem contains refrigerant underhigh pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury, damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring linestobed disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compressor Oil, and Refrigerants.

Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

BodyLubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium-based grease, such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to

412MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR® Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent, directly into the lock cylinder.

WindshieldWiperBlades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non-abrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function.

AddingWasherFluid

The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer (if equipped) is shared. The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator anti-freeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take

some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers.

WARNING!

Commercialwindshieldwashersolventsareflammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution.

ExhaustSystem

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

CAUTION!

The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and causes serious damage to the engine.

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage.

CAUTION!

Damagetothecatalyticconvertercanresultifyour vehicleisnotkeptinproperoperatingcondition.In theeventofenginemalfunction,particularlyinvolvingenginemisfireorotherapparentlossofperformance,haveyourvehicleservicedpromptly.Continuedoperationofyourvehiclewithasevere malfunctioncouldcausetheconvertertooverheat, resultinginpossibledamagetotheconverterand vehicle.

WARNING!

Ahotexhaustsystemcanstartafireifyouparkover materialsthatcanburn.Suchmaterialsmightbe grassorleavescomingintocontactwithyourehaust system.Donotparkoroperateyourvehicleinareas whereyourehaustsystemcancontactanythingthat canburn.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune up to manufacturer's specifications, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing.
• Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
• Do not allow the vehicle to run out of fuel.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.

416MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CoolingSystem

WARNING!

Youorotherscanbebadlyburnedbyhotengine coolant(antifreeze)orsteamfromyourradiator.If youseeorhearsteamcomingfromunderthehood, donotopenthehooduntiltheradiatorhashadtime tocool.Nevertrytoopenacoolingsystempressure capwhentheradiatororcoolantbottleishot.

EngineCoolantChecks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser (if

equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core.

Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

CoolingSystem—Drain,Flush,andRefill

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).

Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals.

SelectionOfEngineCoolant

Use only the manufacturer's recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for the correct fluid type.

CAUTION!

• Mixingofenginecoolant(antifreeze)otherthan thespecifiedHOATenginecoolant(antifreeze) mayresultinenginedamageandmaydecrease corrosionprotection.Ifanon-HOATenginecoolant(antifreeze)isintroducedintothecooling systeminanemergency,itshouldbereplacedwith thespecifiedenginecoolant(antifreeze)assoonas possible.
• Donotusewateraloneoralcohol-basedengine coolant(antifreeze)products.Donotuseadditionalrustinhibitorsorantirustproducts,asthey maynotbecompatiblewiththeantifreeze/engine coolant(antifreeze)andmayplugtheradiator.

(Continued)

418MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

CAUTION!(Continued)

- This vehicle has not been designed for use with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol base engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.

AddingEngineCoolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to 5 Years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze).

When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below -34°F (-37°C) are anticipated.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.

Please note that it is the owner's responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated.

NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) changes.

CoolingSystemPressureCap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant reserve tank.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

ThewarningwordsDONOTOPENHOTonthe coolingsystempressurecapareasafetyprecaution. Neveraddenginecoolant(antifreeze)whentheengineisoverheated.Donotloosenorremovethecap tocoolanoverheatedengine.Heatcausespressureto buildupinthecoolingsystem.Topreventscalding orinjury,donotremovethepressurecapwhilethe systemishotorunderpressure.

DisposalofUsedEngineCoolant

Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it

420MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.

EngineCoolantLevel

The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine idling, and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

PointstoRemember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant bottle.
• Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE421

engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing.

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, or if the level in the recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure-tested for leaks.
• Maintain the engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at 50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean.

- Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.

BrakeSystem

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the "Maintenance Schedule" in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Ridingthebrakescanleadtobrakefailureand possiblyanaccident.Drivingwithyourfootresting orridingonthebrakepedalcanresultinabnormally highbraketemperatures,excessiveliningwear,and possiblebrakedamage.Youwouldnothaveyourfull brakingcapacityinanemergency.

422MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

PowerDiscBrakes

Disc brakes do not require adjustment; however, several hard stops during the break-in period are recommended to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material.

BrakeMasterCylinder

The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. If necessary, add fluid to bring level to the full level mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder. With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear. If the brake fluid level is abnormally low, check system for leaks.

Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for the correct fluid type.

WARNING!

- Useonlymanufacturer's recommended brake fluid. Referto "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for the correct fluid type. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brakes system and/or impair its performance. The property of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

(Continued)

WARNING!(Continued)

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir to secure data all times. Brake fluid a open container absorbsmoisture from the air resulting in lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a accident.
  • Overfillingthebrakefluidreservoircanresultin spillingbrakefluidonhotengineparts, causing thebrakefluidtocatchfire.Brakefluidcanalso damagepaintedandvinylsurfaces,careshouldbe takentoavoiditscontactwiththesesurfaces.

WARNING!(Continued)

- Donotallowpetroleumbasedfluidtocontaminatethebrakefluid.Brakesealcomponentscould bedamaged,causingpartialorcompletebrake failure.Thiscouldresultinanaccident.

AutomaticTransmission—IfEquipped

SelectionofLubricant

It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only manufacturer's recommended transmission fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for the correct fluid type. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid.

(Continued)

CAUTION!

Usingatransmissionfluidotherthanthemanufac-turer'srecommendedfluidmaycausedeterioration intransmissionshiftqualityand/ororqueconverter shudder. Usingatransmissionfluidotherthanthe manufacturer'srecommendedfluidwillresultin morefrequentfluidandfilterchanges. Referto "Fluids,Lubricants,andGenuineParts" inthissec-tionforthecorrectfluidtype.

FluidLevelCheck—42RLE

Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 180° F ( 82° C). This occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature, the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips.

If the transmission overheats, a "HOTOIL" message will be displayed in the odometer and a chime will sound.

To properly check the automatic transmission fluid level, the following procedure must be used:

1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
3. Fully apply the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position ending with the shift lever in PARK.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides. The fluid level should be between the HOT (upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. Verify that a solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as required into the dipstick tube. Donotoverfill. After

adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.

NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature, the fluid level should be between the two cold (lower) holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70° F ( 21° C) (room temperature). If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature, it should be between the HOT (upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches 180° F ( 21° C). Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature.

CAUTION!

Beawarethatifthefluidtemperatureisbelow50°F (10°C), itmaynotregisteronthedipstick. Donotadd fluiduntilthetemperatureiselevatedenoughto produceanaccuratereading.

1. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.

NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube.

SpecialAdditives

Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals.

CAUTION!

Donotusechemicalflushesinyourtransmissionas thechemicalscandamageyourtransmissioncomponents.SuchdamageisnotcoveredbytheNew VehicleLimitedWarranty.

HydraulicClutchFluid—ManualTransmission

The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance-free system. In the event of leakage or other malfunction, the system must be replaced.

ManualTransmission—IfEquipped

SelectionofLubricant

Use only manufacturer's recommended manual transmission fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for the correct fluid type.

FluidLevelCheck

Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 in (4.76 mm) below the bottom of the hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.

FrequencyofFluidChange

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the lubricant has become contaminated with water. If contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed immediately.

TransferCase—IfEquipped

FluidLevelCheck

The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole (A) when the vehicle is in a level position.

AddingFluid

Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid begins to run out of the hole.

Drain

First remove the fill plug (B), then the drain plug (C). The recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).

CAUTION!

Whenreplacingtheplugs, donotovertightenthem. Youcoulddamagethemandcausethemtoleak.

SelectionofLubricant

Use only manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for the correct fluid type.

Front/RearAxleFluid

FluidLevelCheck

Lubricant should be at the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.

AddingFluid

Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above.

428MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

SelectionofLubricant

Use only manufacturer's recommended fluid. Refer to "Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts" in this section for the correct fluid type.

MaintenanceAfterOff-RoadDriving

After extended operation in mud, sand or water, or similar dirty conditions, have your brake drums, brake linings, and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon as possible. This will prevent any abrasive material from causing excessive wear or unpredictable braking action.

Following off-road usage, completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle. Check the tires, body structure, steering, suspension and exhaust system for damage. Check the threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on the chassis, drivetrain components, steering and suspension. Retighten, if required, to torque values specified in the Service Manual. Also check for accumulations of vegetation or brush that could become a fire hazard, or conceal damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts. Check the air conditioning drain tube on the lower dash wall in the engine compartment for mud or debris, and clean as required. A plugged tube will adversely affect air conditioning performance.

CAUTION!

Underfrequentheavy-dutydrivingconditions, changealllubricants,andlubricatebodycomponentsmoreoftenthaninnormalservicetoprevent excessivewear.

AppearanceCareandProtectionfromCorrosion

ProtectionofBodyandPaintfromCorrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly

corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-body protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.

WhatCausesCorrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
  • Stone and gravel impact.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near sea-coast localities.
  • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

• Bird droppings.

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash or equivalent, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR®Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR® Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains, and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.

430MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

- Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Donotuseabrasiveorstrongcleaningmaterials suchassteelwoolorscouringpowder,whichwill scratchmetalandpaintedsurfaces.
• Useofpowerwashersexceeding1,200psi (8274kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

SpecialCare

- If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels and tailgate are kept clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., assure that such materials are well packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider installing mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

- Use MOPAR®Touch-Up Paint or equivalent on scratches or chips as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match the color of your vehicle.

WheelandWheelTrimCare

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome-plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove heavy soil, use MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent, or select a nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only MOPAR® cleaners or equivalent are recommended. Do not use oven cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels' protective finish.

StainRepelFabricCleaningProcedure—If Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR®Total Clean or equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR®Multi-Purpose Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products.

InteriorCare

Use MOPAR®Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.

Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent, then MOPAR®Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR®Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.

WARNING!

Donotusevolatilesolventsforcleaningpurposes. Manyarepotentiallyflammableand,ifusedin closedareas,theymaycauserespiratoryharm.

CAUTION!

Wheninstallinghangingairfreshenersinyourvehicle,readtheinstallationinstructionscarefully. Someairfreshenerswilldamagethefinishof paintedordecoratedpartsifallowedtodirectly contactanysurface.

GlassSurfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR®Glass Cleaner or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive-type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rearview mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.

CleaningPlasticInstrumentClusterLenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.

SeatBeltMaintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR®Total Clean or equivalent, a mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

AppearanceCareforFabricTopModels

CAUTION!

Tomaintaintheappearanceofyourvehicle'sinterior trimandtop,followtheseprecautions:

• Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top down, as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior trim.
• Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top material, as damage may result.
• Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on the paint, leaving a streak.
• After cleaning your vehicle's fabric top, always make sure it is completely dry before lowering.

- Be especially careful when washing the windows by following the directions for "Care of Fabric Top Windows."

WASHING—Use MOPAR®Car Wash or equivalent, or mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush with soft bristles. If extra cleaning is required, use MOPAR®Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild foaming cleaner on the entire top, but support the top from underneath.

RINSING—Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water. Remember to allow the top to dry before lowering it.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage, stains or mild dew on the top material:

CAUTION!(Continued)

• Avoidhigh-pressurecarwashes, astheycandamagethetopmaterial. Also, increased waterpressure may force past the weather strips.
• Itisrecommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it. Operating the top, opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle's interior.
• Usecarewhenwashingthevehicle,waterpressure directedattheweatherstripsealsmaycausewater toleakintothevehicle'sinterior.
• Carelesshandlingandstorageoftheremovable roofpanelsmaydamagetheseals,causingwaterto leakintothevehicle'sinterior.
• Thefrontpanel(s)mustbepositionedproperlyto ensuresealing.Improperinstallationcancause watertoleakintothevehicle'sinterior.

(Continued)

CareofFabricTopWindows

CAUTION!

Yourvehicle'sfabrictophaspliableplasticwindows whichcanbescratchedunlessspecialcareistakenby followingthesedirections:

1. Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. Instead, usea microfibertowelorsoftcottonclothmoistened with coldorwarm, cleanwater, and wipeacrossthewindow, notupanddown. MOPAR®Jeep Soft Glass Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all plastic windows without scratching. It removes fine scratches to improve visibility and provides UV protection to help prevent yellowing.

2. When washing, neverusehotwateror anything stronger than a mild soap. Never use solvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaning agents.

3. Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then wipe with a soft and slightly moist, clean cloth.

4. When removing frost, snow or ice, never use a scraper orde-icingchemicals. Use warm water only if you must clean the window quickly.
5. Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from off-road driving will have a major impact on zipper operation. Even normal on-road driving and vehicle washing will eventually impact window zipper operation. To maintain ease of use of the window zippers, each window zipper should be cleaned and lubricated regularly. Use MO-PAR®Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent to ease zipper operation. Before applying, make sure the zipper teeth are clear of sand, mud, and other materials. Clean both sides of the zipper, not just one side. Rinse both zipper halves with fresh water and allow to dry. Aggressively work the MOPAR®Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the zipper teeth.

436MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

If a stuck zipper slide is experienced, work the MOPAR® Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the zipper slide. Several applications may be required before the zipper comes free.

1. Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any tape to the windows. Adhesives are hard to remove and may damage the windows.

FUSES

TotallyIntegratedPowerModule

The Totally Integrated Power Module (TIPM) is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses and relays. A label that identifies each component is printed on the inside of the cover.

TotallyIntegratedPowerModule(TIPM)

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
J1 — —
J2 30 Amp	Pink		Transfer Case Module
J3 — —

MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE437

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
J4 25 Amp	Natural		Driver Door Node
J5 25 Amp	Natural		Passenger Door Node
J6 40 Amp	Green		Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Pump Feed/ESP
J7 30 Amp	Pink		Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Valve Feed/ESP
J8 — —
J9 40 Amp	Green		PZEV Sec Motor Feed/Flex Fuel
J10 30 Amp	Pink		Headlamp Wash Relay/Manifold Tuning Valve

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
J11 30 Amp Pink			Sway Bar
J13 60 Amp Yellow			Ignition Off Draw (IOD) — Main
J14 40 Amp Green			EBL (Rear Window Defogger)
J15 30 Amp Pink			Rear Blower
J17 40 Amp Green			Starter Solenoid
J18 20 Amp Blue			Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Trans Range
J19 60 Amp Yellow			Radiator Fan
J20 30 Amp Pink			Front Wiper LO/HI

438MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
J21 20 AmpBlue		Front/Rear Washer
J22 — Spare
M1 15 Amp	Blue	Center High-Mounted Stop Light (CHMSL)/Switch Stop Lamp Feed
M2 20 Amp	Yellow	Relay Trailer Lighting (Stop)
M3 20 Amp	Yellow	Frt/Rear Axle Locker Relay
M4 — —
M5 — —
M6 20 Amp	Yellow	Power Outlet #1/Rain Sensor

CavityCartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
M7 20 Amp	Yellow	Power Outlet #2 (BATT/ACC SELECT)
M8 20 Amp	Yellow	Front Heated Seat
M9 20 Amp	Yellow	Rear Heated Seat (If Equipped)
M10 20 Amp	Yellow	Ignition Off Draw — Vehicle Entertainment System (IOD-VES), Satellite Digital Audio Receiver (SDARS), DVD, Hands-Free Module (HFM), RADIO, Antenna (ANT), Universal Garage Door Opener (UGDO), Vanity Lamp (VANITY LP)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE439

CavityCartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
M11 10 Amp	Red	(Ignition Off Draw)IOD-HVAC/ATC,MW SENSR,Underhood Lamp (UH LMP)
M12 30 Amp	Green	Amplifier (AMP)
M13 20 Amp	Yellow	Ignition Off Draw—Cabin Compartment Node (IOD-CCN), Wireless Control Module (WCM), SI-REN, Multifunction Control Switch (MULTIFCTN SW)
M14 20 Amp	Yellow	Trailer Tow (Export Only)

CavityCartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
M15 20 Amp	Yellow	COL MOD, IR SNS, Heater Ventilation, Air Conditioning/Automatic Temperature Control (HVAC/ATC), Rear View Mirror (RR VW MIR), Cabin Compartment Node (CCN), Transfer Case Switch (T-CASE SW), RUN/ST, Multi-Function Control Switch (MULTIFTCN SW), Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM), Glow Plug Module (GLW PLG MOD) — Export Diesel Only

440MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
M16 10 Amp	Red	Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
M17 15 Amp	Blue	Left Tail/License/Park Lamp (LT-TAIL/LIC/PRK LMP)
M18 15 Amp	Blue	Right Tail/Park/Run Lamp (RT-TAIL/PRK/RUN LMP)
M19 25 Amp	Natural	Auto Shut Down (ASD #1 and #2)
M20 15 Amp	Blue	Cabin Compartment Node Interior Light (CCN INT LIGHT), Switch Bank (SW BANK)
M21 20 Amp	Yellow	Auto Shut Down (ASD #3)

Cavity	Cartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
M22 10 Amp		Red	Right Horn (RT HORN (HI/LOW)
M23 10 Amp		Red	Left Horn (LT HORN (HI/LOW)
M24 25 Amp		Natural	Rear Wiper (REAR WIPER)
M25 20 Amp		Yellow	Fuel Pump (FUEL PUMP), Diesel Lift Pump (DSL LIFT PUMP) — Export Only
M26 — —
M27 10 Amp		Red	Ignition Switch Feed, Wireless Module
M28 10 Amp		Red	PCM Feed/TCM
M29 — —

MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE441

CavityCartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
M30 15 Amp	Blue	Wiper Motor Frt, J1962 Diagnostic Feed
M31 20 Amp	Yellow	Backup Lamps (B/U LAMPS)
M32 10 Amp	Red	Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), TT EUROPE
M33 10 Amp	Red	Next Generation Controller (NGC), Global Powertrain Engine Controller (GPEC)

CavityCartridge Fuse	Mini Fuse	Description
M34 10 Amp	Red	Park Assist (PRK ASST), Heater Ventilation, Air Conditioning Module (HVAC MOD), Headlamp Wash (HDLP WASH), Compass (COMPAS)
M35 10 Amp	Red	Heated Mirrors
M36 20 Amp	Yellow	Power Outlet
M37 10 Amp	Red	Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Electronic Stability Program (ESP), Stop Lamp Switch (STP LP SW), Fuel Pump Rly Hi Control
M38 25 Amp	Natural	Lock/Unlock Motors(LOCK/UNLOCK MTRS)

CAUTION!

- WheninstallingtheIntegratedPowerModule cover,itisimportanttoensurethecoverisproperlypositionedandfullylatched.Failuretodoso mayallowwatertogetintotheIntegratedPower Module,andpossiblyresultinanelectricalsystem failure.

(Continued)

CAUTION!(Continued)

Whenreplacingablownfuse,itisimportantto useonlyafusehavingthecorrectamperagerating. Theuseofafusewitharatingotherthanindicated mayresultinadangerouselectricalsystemoverload.Ifaproperlyratedfusecontinuestoblow,it indicatesaprobleminthecircuitthatmustbe corrected.

VEHICLESTORAGE

If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days, you may want to take steps to protect your battery. You may:

• Remove Cartridge fuse #15 in the Power Distribution Center labeled Ignition-Off Draw (IOD).

• Store the removed IOD fuse in the Power Distribution Center location #11 labeled "IOD Storage."

• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.

• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again.

REPLACEMENTBULBS

InteriorLightsBulbType

Auto. Trans. Indicator Lamp. 658

Heater Control Lamps (2). 194

Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp

(Rear Window Defogger, and Rear Wash/Wipe) . . . . * *

Soundbar Dome Lamp. 912

** Bulbs only available from authorized dealer.

ExteriorLightsBulbType

Backup Lamps (2) 3 1 5 7
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (1). . . . . . . . L.E.D.
Fog Lamps 9145
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) 3 1 5 7
Front Side Marker Lamps (2) 168
Headlamps (2) H 1 3
Rear Stop/Tail/Turn Lamps (2) 3 1 5 7
License Lamp 194

NOTE: Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your local authorized dealer.

If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.

444MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

BULBREPLACEMENT

NOTE:Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process.

Headlamp

1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the top 1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other.
4. Turn both park and turn signal socket assemblies 1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove.

5. Remove the four screws holding the metal retaining ring.

6. Remove the lamp from the collar.

7. Grasp the bulb and turn 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock position.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and push the connector locking tab to the lock position.

CAUTION!

Donottouchthenewbulbwithyourfingers.Oil contaminationwillseverelyshortenbulblife.Ifthe bulbcomesincontactwithanyoilysurface,cleanthe bulbwithrubbingalcohol.

1. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb 1/4 turn clockwise.

FrontPark/TurnSignal

1. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers along the top 1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove.
2. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other.
3. Turn the socket assembly 1/4 turn counterclockwise and remove from housing. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.

FrontSideMarker

1. Reach under the front fender flare and locate the front side marker socket.
2. Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise 1/3 turn and remove it from the housing. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.

FrontFogLamp

1. Locate the front fog lamp in the front fascia, and disconnect the electrical connector from underneath.
2. Turn the bulb 1/4 turn counterclockwise.

CAUTION!

Donottouchthenewbulbwithyourfingers.Oil contaminationwillseverelyshortenbulblife.Ifthe bulbcomesincontactwithanyoilysurface,cleanthe bulbwithrubbingalcohol.

446MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE

RearTail,Stop,TurnSignal,andBackupLamp

1. Remove the two inboard screws attaching the tail light housing to the body. DONOTREMOVETHEOUTER SCREWSATANYTIME.

1. Separate the housing from the body by pushing the lamp inboard while pulling the lamp away from the body.

2. Rotate the appropriate socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise, then remove it from the housing.

3. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace.

CenterHigh-MountedStopLamp(CHMSL)

The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire. If service is needed, obtain the LED/Cover Assembly from your local authorized dealer.

1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the four screws holding the lens/cover in place on the spare tire carrier.
3. Disconnect the wire harness from the back of the LED cover.

FLUIDCAPACITIES

U.S.Metric
Fuel(Approximate)—TwoDoorModels18.5 Gallons 70 Liters
Fuel(Approximate)—FourDoorModels22.5 Gallons 85 Liters
EngineOilwithFilter
3.8 Liter Engine 6 Quarts 5.7 Liters
CoolingSystem*
3.8 Liter Engine (MOPAR®Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)	13 Quarts 12 Liters
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTSANDGENUINEPARTS

Engine

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Engine Coolant MOPAR®Antifreeze	/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR®Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs RE14PLP5 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Fuel Selection 87 Octane

Chassis

ComponentFluid,Lubricant,orGenuinePart
Automatic Transmission MOPAR® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Manual Transmission MOPAR® Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent (meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-9224).
Transfer Case MOPAR® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Axle Differential (Front)	MOPAR® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5) or equivalent.
Axle Differential (Rear)	226 RBI (Model 44) - MOPAR® Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 80W-90) (API GL-5) or equivalent. For trailer towing, use MOPAR®Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W-140) or equivalent. Models equipped with Trac-LokTM require an additive.
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR®DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir	MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.

MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

CONTENTS

■Emissions Control System Maintenance ..... 4 5 2

□Required Maintenance Intervals ..... 4 5 4

■Maintenance Schedule 452

452MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

EMISSIONSCONTROLSYSTEMMAINTENANCE

The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in boldtype must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system. These and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip driving.

Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected.

NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emissions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.

MAINTENANCESCHEDULE

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, "CHAngE OIL" will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.

Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate, this means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

NOTE:

- The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle's oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated.

MAINTENANCESCHEDULES453

• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.

Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If this scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Odometer/Trip Odometer” in the “Instrument Cluster Description” section of this manual.

At Each Stop for Fuel

- Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.

• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required.
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, power steering and transmission and add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation.

Once a Month

454MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

At Each Oil Change

• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Check the manual transmission fluid level.

CAUTION!

Failuretoperformtherequiredmaintenanceitems mayresultindamagetothevehicle.

RequiredMaintenanceIntervals

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.

6,000Miles(10,000km)or 6MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Rotatetires.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

12,000Miles(20,000km)or12MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

☐Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter,replaceifnecessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.

☐Inspectexhaustsystem.Performthefirstinspectionat12,000miles(20000km)or 12months.

☐InspecttheCVjoints.Performthefirstinspectionat12,000miles(20000km)or 12months.

□Inspectthefrontsuspension, tierodendsandbootseals; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

456MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

18,000Miles(30,000km)or 18MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Rotatetires.

□Inspectthefront&rearaxlefluid,change ifusingyourvehicleforpolice,taxi,fleet, off-roadoffrequenttrailertowing.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

24,000Miles(40,000km)or24MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

☐Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter,replaceifnecessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.

□InspecttheCVjoints.

□Inspectexhaustsystem.

☐Inspectthefrontsuspension, tierodendsandbootseals; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

30,000Miles(50,000km)or30MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

□Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.

□Adjustparkingbrakeonvehiclesequippedwithfour-wheeldiscbrakes.

☐Changethemanualtransmissionfluidifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:trailer towing,snowplowing,heavyloading,taxi,police,deliveryservice(commercialservice),off-road,desertoperationormorethan50%ofyourdrivingisatsustainedhighspeeds duringhotweather,above90°F(32°C).

□Inspectthetransfercasefluid.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

SignatureAuthorizedChryslerDealer

458MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

36,000Miles(60,000km)or36MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

☐Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter,replaceifnecessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.

☐ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailertowing.

□Inspectthefrontsuspension, tierodendsandbootseals; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

SignatureAuthorizedChryslerDealer

42,000Miles(70,000km)or 42MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Rotatetires.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

48,000Miles(80,000km)or48MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

☐Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter,replaceifnecessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.

□InspecttheCVjoints.

□Inspectexhaustsystem.

☐Inspectthefrontsuspension, tierodendsandbootseals; replaceifnecessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

SignatureAuthorizedChryslerDealer

54,000Miles(90,000km)or 54MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Rotatetires.

□Inspectthefront&rearaxlefluid,change ifusingyourvehicleforpolice,taxi,fleet, off-roadorfrequenttrailertowing.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

460MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

60,000Miles(100,000km)or60MonthsMaintenanceServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.
□Rotatetires.
□Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.
□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.
□Adjustparkingbrakeonvehiclesequippedwithfour-wheeldiscbrakes.
☐ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
☐ Change the automatic transmission fluid and main sump filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet or frequent trailer towing.
☐ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
☐Flushandreplacetheenginecoolantat60monthsifnotdoneat102,000miles(170000km).
□Inspectthefrontsuspension, tierodendsandbootseals; replaceifnecessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

66,000Miles(110,000km)or 66MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
□Rotatetires.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

72,000Miles(120,000km)or72MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.
□Rotatetires.
☐Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter,replaceifnecessary.
□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.
☐ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailertowing.
□InspecttheCVjoints.
□Inspectexhaustsystem.
☐Inspectthefrontsuspension, tierodendsandbootseals; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

462MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

78,000Miles(130,000km)or 78MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Rotatetires.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

84,000Miles(140,000km)or84MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

☐Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter,replaceifnecessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.

□Inspectthefrontsuspension, tierodendsandbootseals; replaceifnecessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

90,000Miles(150,000km)or90MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

☐Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.

□InspectandreplacePCVvalveifnecessary.†

□Adjustparkingbrakeonvehiclesequippedwithfour-wheeldiscbrakes.

☐Changethemanualtransmissionfluidifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:trailer towing,snowplowing,heavyloading,taxi,police,deliveryservice(commercialservice),off-road,desertoperationormorethan50%ofyourdrivingisatsustainedhighspeeds duringhotweather,above90°F(32°C).

□Inspectthetransfercasefluid.

☐ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailertowing.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

464MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

96,000Miles(160,000km)or96MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

☐Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter,replaceifnecessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.

□InspecttheCVjoints.

□Inspectexhaustsystem.

□Inspectthefrontsuspension, tierodendsandbootseals; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

102,000Miles(170,000km)or 102MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Rotatetires.

□Replacetheignitioncables.

□Replacethesparkplugs.

☐Flushandreplacetheenginecoolantif notdoneat60months.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

108,000Miles(180,000km)or108MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.
□Rotatetires.
☐Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter,replaceifnecessary.
□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.
☐ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailertowing.
☐Inspectthefrontsuspension, tierodendsandbootseals; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

114,000Miles(190,000km)or 114MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Rotatetires.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

466MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

120,000Miles(200,000km)or120MonthsMaintenanceServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

□Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.

☐Replaceaccessorydrivebelt(s).

□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.

Inspectexhaustsystem.

□Inspectthefrontsuspension, tierodendsandbootseals; replace if necessary.

□Adjustparkingbrakeonvehiclesequippedwithfour-wheeldiscbrakes.

□InspecttheCVjoints.

☐ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.

☐ Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service), off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).

□Changetheautomatictransmissionfluid,andfilter(s).

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

126,000Miles(210,000km)or 126MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.
□Rotatetires.
□Inspectthefront&rearaxlefluid,change ifusingyourvehicleforpolice,taxi,fleet, off-roadorfrequenttrailertowing.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

132,000Miles(220,000km)or132MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.
□Rotatetires.
☐Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter,replaceifnecessary.
□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.
□Inspectthefrontsuspension, tierodendsandbootseals; replaceifnecessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

468MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

138,000Miles(230,000km)or 138MonthsMaintenance ServiceSchedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoil filter.

□Rotatetires.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

144,000Miles(240,000km)or144MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

☐Ifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:Dustyoroff-roadconditions.Inspectthe engineaircleanerfilter,replaceifnecessary.

□Inspectthebrakelinings,replaceifnecessary.

☐ Inspect the front & rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailertowing.

□InspecttheCVjoints.

□Inspectexhaustsystem.

☐Inspectthefrontsuspension, tierodendsandbootseals; replace if necessary.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

150,000Miles(250,000km)or150MonthsMaintenanceService Schedule

□Changetheengineoilandengineoilfilter.

□Rotatetires.

☐Replacetheengineaircleanerfilter.

□Adjustparkingbrakeonvehiclesequippedwithfour-wheeldiscbrakes.

☐Changethemanualtransmissionfluidifusingyourvehicleforanyofthefollowing:trailer towing,snowplowing,heavyloading,taxi,police,deliveryservice(commercialservice),off-road,desertoperationormorethan50%ofyourdrivingisatsustainedhighspeeds duringhotweather,above90°F(32°C).

□Inspectthetransfercasefluid.

OdometerReadingDate

RepairOrder#DealerCode

Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

470MAINTENANCESCHEDULES

† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions warranty.

WARNING!

• Youcanbebadlyinjuredworkingonorarounda motorvehicle.Doonlyserviceworkforwhichyou havetheknowledgeandtherightequipment.If youhaveanydoubtaboutyourabilitytoperform aservicejob,takeyourvehicletoacompetent mechanic.
• Failuretoproperlyinspectandmaintainyour vehiclecouldresultinacomponentmalfunction andeffectvehiclehandlingandperformance.This couldcauseanaccident

IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

■Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Vehicle 473

□Prepare For The Appointment.... 473

□Prepare A List.... 473

□Be Reasonable With Requests.... 473

■If You Need Assistance.... 473

□Chrysler LLC Customer Center....474

□ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 474

□ In Mexico Contact 474

□Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)....475

□ServiceContract 475

■Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . 4 7 6

■MOPAR®Parts 476

■ Reporting Safety Defects 476

□In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. 476

□In Canada 47

■ Publication Order Forms 477

472IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

■Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire

Quality Grades 479

□Treadwear 479

□Traction Grades 479

□Temperature Grades....480

SUGGESTIONSFOROBTAININGSERVICEFOR YOURVEHICLE

PrepareForTheAppointment

If you're having warranty work done, be sure to have the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's service history. This can often provide a clue to the current problem.

PrepareAList

Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the specific work you want done. If you've had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know.

BeReasonableWithRequests

If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.

IFYOUNEEDASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.

474IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer's service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealership. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.

Any communication to the manufacturer's customer center should include the following information:

• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number (home and office)
  • Authorized dealership name
  • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

ChryslerLLCCustomerCenter

P.O. Box 21-8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321-8004

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: [phone]

InMexicocontact:

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

CustomerAssistanceForTheHearingOrSpeech Impaired(TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.

ServiceContract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer's Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer's service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer

476IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You'll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns.

WARNING!

Engineexhaust, some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, oremit, chemicals known to the State of Californiatocause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain product of component wear contain, oremit, chemicals known to the State of Californiatocause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTYINFORMATION(U.S.VehiclesOnly)

See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle.

MOPAR®PARTS

MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.

REPORTINGSAFETYDEFECTS

Inthe50UnitedStatesandWashington,D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

InCanada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to: Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9.

PUBLICATIONORDERFORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form.

NOTE:A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

478IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

• ServiceManuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

• DiagnosticProcedureManuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

- Owner'sManuals

These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.

Call toll free at:

• 1-800-890-4038(U.S.)
• 1-800-387-1143(Canada)

Or

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

- www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENTOFTRANSPORTATIONUNIFORM TIREQUALITYGRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire's manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle.

All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.

TractionGrades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!

Thetractiongradeassignedtothistireisbasedon straight-aheadbrakingtractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

480IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE

TemperatureGrades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

WARNING!

Thetemperaturegradeforthistireisestablished for atirethatisproperlyinflatedandnotoverloaded. Excessivespeed,under-inflation,orexcessiveloading,eitherseparatelyorincombination,cancause heatbuildupandpossibletirefailure.

INDEX

ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ..... 203,316

Adding Fuel 361

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 409

Air Conditioner Maintenance....4 1 0

Air Conditioning.... 266,269

Air Conditioning Controls....269

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips 270

Air Conditioning Refrigerant 41

Air Conditioning System 269

Air Filter 409

Air Pressure, Tires 343

Airbag 48

Airbag Deployment 56

Airbag Light 58,76,204

Airbag Maintenance 58

Airbag, Side 5 5

Alarm Light 204

Alarm (Security Alarm) 17

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle 8

Antenna, Satellite Radio 259

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) 4 4 7

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)....316,319

Anti-Lock Warning Light 203

Appearance Care 428

Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) 18

Auto Down Power Windows 36

Automatic Transmission 423

Fluid and Filter Changes 4 2 3

Fluid Level Check 424

Fluid Type 423

Gear Ranges 288

Shifting 287

Special Additives 425

Torque Converter 291

Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..... 1 0 6

Auxiliary Power Outlet 106

Axle Lock 296,297

INDEX 483

Battery 409

Emergency Starting 394

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ..... 2 3

Belts, Seat 39,75

Body Mechanism Lubrication 4 1 1

Brake Assist System 320

Brake Assist Warning Light....2 1 1

Brake Control System, Electronic ..... 3 1 8

Brake System 42

Anti-Lock (ABS) 316,319

Master Cylinder 422

Parking 31

Warning Light 202

Brake/Transmission Interlock 286

Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ..... 7 3

Bulb Replacement 443,444

Bulbs, Light 76

Caps, Filler

Fuel 361

Power Steering 314

Car Washes 429

Carbon Monoxide Warning....74,360

Cargo Light 97

Cargo (Vehicle Loading) 3 6 3

Cellular Phone 82,263

Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4 6

Certification Label 363

Chains, Tire 350

Changing A Flat Tire 389

Chart, Tire Sizing 3 3 5

Check Engine Light

(Malfunction Indicator Light)....210,403

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 4

Checks, Safety 74

Child Restraint....61,68,71

Capacities, Fluid 4 4 7 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 66,68

484INDEX

Child Seat 65

Climate Control 264

Clock....220,234,238,247

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..... 2 6 3

Compass 213

Compass Calibration....215

Computer, Trip/Travel ..... 212,213

Console....109

Console, Floor 109

Contract, Service 475

Cooling System 416

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze)....4 1 8

Coolant Capacity 447

Coolant Level 420

Disposal of Used Coolant 4 1 9

Drain, Flush, and Refill 4 1 7

Inspection 416

Points to Remember 420

Pressure Cap 419

Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 417,447

Corrosion Protection 428

Cruise Light 205

Cupholders....108

Customer Assistance 473

Data Recorder, Event 59

Daytime Running Lights 97

Dealer Service 405

Defroster, Rear Window ..... 193

Defroster, Windshield 76,265,267

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers 100

Diagnostic System, Onboard ..... 4 0 2

Dimmer Switch, Headlight 96

Dipsticks

Oil (Engine) 406

Power Steering 314

Disabled Vehicle Towing 397

Disarming, Theft System 18

INDEX485

Disposal

Engine Oil 408

Used Coolant (Antifreeze)....4 1 9

Door Locks 30

Doors 26

Driver's Seat Back Tilt 85

Driving....300

Off-Pavement 300

Off-Road 300

Dual Top 110

Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ..... 1 0 6

Electrical Power Outlets 106

Electronic Brake Control System 318

Anti-Lock Brake System 319

Brake Assist System....320

Electronic Roll Mitigation 324

Electronic Stability Program....3 2 5

Traction Control System 319

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) 3 2 4

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..... 1 0 2

Electronic Stability Program (ESP) 325

Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ..... 2 1 2

Emergency Brake 315

Emergency, In Case of

Jacking....389

Jump Starting 394

Tow Hooks 396

Emission Control System Maintenance ..... 403,452

Engine

Air Cleaner 409

Block Heater 281

Break-In Recommendations....73

Compartment 401

Compartment Identification 401

Exhaust Gas Caution 74,360

Fails to Start 278

Flooded, Starting 278

486INDEX

Fuel Requirements 356,447
Jump Starting 394
Oil 406,44
Oil Disposal 408
Oil Filter 408
Oil Selection 447
Overheating 38
Starting 277
Temperature Gauge 204
Engine Oil Viscosity 408
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart 408
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . 5 7
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 9
Event Data Recorder 59
Exhaust Gas Caution 74,360
Exhaust System....74,413
Extender, Seat Belt 48
Exterior Finish Care 429
Exterior Lights 76
Fabric Care 432,433
Fabric Top 433
Filters Air Cleaner 409 Engine Oil 408
Finish Care 429
Flashers Hazard Warning....388 Turn Signal....76,201,445,446
Flooded Engine Starting 278
Fluid Capacities 447
Fluid Leaks 76
Fluid Level Checks 427
Automatic Transmission 423
Engine Oil 406
Manual Transmission 426
Power Steering 314
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ..... 4 4 8
Fog Light Service....4 4 5

INDEX487

Fog Lights 96,445

Fold and Tumble Rear Seat....8 8

Folding Rear Seat 91

Folding Windshield 186

Four Wheel Drive....291

Shifting 293

Four Wheel Drive Operation....291

Four-Way Hazard Flasher 388

Front Axle (Differential) 4 2 7

Fuel 356

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) 361

Gasoline 356

Gauge....200

Materials Added 359

Octane Rating....356

Requirements 447

Tank Capacity 447

Fuel System Caution 359,362

Fuses 43

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) 361,363,402

Gasoline (Fuel) 356

Gasoline, Reformulated 357

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends 357

Gauges

Coolant Temperature 204

Fuel 200

Odometer 207

Speedometer 200

Tachometer....204

Gear Ranges 282,288

General Information 17,356

Glass Cleaning 432

Gross Axle Weight Rating 364,366

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 363,366

GVWR 363

Hands-Free Phone (uconnect ^® ) 82

Hard Top 1

Hard Top, Modular ..... 1 1 5

Hard Top Removal....1 1 9

Hazard Warning Flasher 388

Head Restraints 87

Head Rests 87

Headlights Bulb Replacement 44

Dimmer Switch 96

Replacing 444

Switch 95

Heater 264

Heater, Engine Block....281

High Beam Indicator 201

Hill Start Assist 321

Hitches Trailer Towing....368

Holder, Cup 108

Hood Release 93

Hydraulic Clutch Fluid 426

Ignition....12 Key....12

Ignition Key Removal 12

Illuminated Entry 19

Immobilizer (Sentry Key) 14

Infant Restraint 61

Inflation Pressure Tires 343

Inside Rearview Mirror 81

Instrument Cluster 199

Instrument Panel and Controls ..... 1 9 8

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 433

Integrated Power Module (Fuses) 436

Interior Appearance Care 432

Interior Lights 97

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) 100

Introduction 4

Jack Location 390

Jack Operation 389,391,392

INDEX489

Jacking Instructions....391

Jump Starting 394

Key, Programming....16

Key, Replacement....1 5

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)....14

Key-In Reminder 1

Keyless Entry System 19

Keys....12

Lane Change and Turn Signals 201

Lap Belts 39

Lap/Shoulder Belts 39

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . 66,68

Latches....76

Lead Free Gasoline 356

Leaks, Fluid 76

Light Bulbs....76

Lights....76,94

Airbag 58,76,204

Alarm 204

Anti-Lock 203

Anti-Lock Warning 203

Back-Up 446

Brake Assist Warning 211,331

Brake Warning 202

Bulb Replacement 4 4 4

Cargo 97

Center Mounted Stop 4 4 6

Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) ..... 2 1 0

Cruise 205

Daytime Running....97

Dimmer Switch, Headlight 96

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

Indicator 211,331

Electronic Throttle Control Warning ..... 2 1 2

Engine Temperature Warning 20

490INDEX

Exterior 76
Fog 96,445
Hazard Warning Flasher 388
Headlight Switch 95
Headlights 4 4 4
High Beam....201
High Beam Indicator 201
Instrument Cluster 95
Interior 97
Lights On Reminder 95
Low Fuel 200
Oil Pressure 201
Passing....96
Rear Servicing 446
Rear Tail 4 4 6
Seat Belt Reminder 201
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) 204
Service 4 4 4
Side Marker 446
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) 204
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) 206
Traction Control 2 11
Turn Signal 76,96,201,445,446
Voltage 200
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ..... 2 0 0
Loading Vehicle 363
Tires 338
Locking Axle 296,297
Locks
Door 30
Power Door 32
Steering Wheel....13
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) 66,68
Lubrication, Body 4 11
[Non-Text]
Maintenance Free Battery 40 9
Maintenance Procedures....40 5

INDEX 491

Maintenance Schedule 452

Malfunction Indicator Light

(Check Engine)....210,403

Manual, Service 477

Manual Transmission....281,426

Fluid Level Check....4 2 6

Lubricant Selection....426

Shift Speeds 282

Master Cylinder (Brakes) 4 2 2

Mini-Trip Computer 212,213

Mirrors 81

Outside....82

Rearview 81

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle 8

Modular Hard Top....1 1 5

Monitor, Tire Pressure System 351

Mopar Parts 404,476

Multi-Function Control Lever 94

New Vehicle Break-In Period 73

Occupant Restraints 38

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) 356

Odometer 207

Trip 206,207

Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) 300

Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) 300

Oil Change Indicator 209

Oil Change Indicator, Reset 209

Oil, Engine 406

Capacity 447

Dipstick 406

Filter 408

Identification Logo 407

Materials Added to 408

Pressure Warning Light 201

Recommendation 407,447

Viscosity 408,447

492INDEX

Oil Pressure Light 201

Onboard Diagnostic System ..... 402,403

Operator Manual (Owner's Manual)....6

Outside Rearview Mirrors 82

Overheating, Engine 205,388

Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) ..... 6,477

Steering 313,314

Windows 35

Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 4 8

Preparation for Jacking 390

Pretensioners

Seat Belts 46

Paint Care 428

Paint Damage 428

Panic Alarm....2 1

Parking Brake 315

Passing Light 96

Pets 73

Phone, Cellular 82

Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect®) 82

Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..... 3 3 9

Polishing and Waxing 42

Power Door Locks....3 2

Radial Ply Tires....346

Radio Operation 263

Radio, Satellite (uconnect®studios) ..... 2 5 8

Rear Axle (Differential) 4 2 7

Rear Swing Gate 37

Rear Window Defroster....193

Rear Window Features 192

Rear Wiper/Washer....192

Rearview Mirrors 81

Recorder, Event Data 59

Recreational Towing 382

Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 3 8 3

INDEX493

Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 3 8 4

Reformulated Gasoline 357

Refrigerant 411

Release, Hood 93

Reminder, Lights On....9 5

Reminder, Seat Belt 46

Remote Control Door Locks 19

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 19

Remote Starting System 24

Replacement Bulbs 4 4 3

Replacement Keys 15

Replacement Parts 404

Replacement Tires 348

Reporting Safety Defects 476

Restraint, Head 87

Restraints, Child 61,65

Restraints, Occupant 38

Rotation, Tires 350

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 75

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 76

Safety Defects, Reporting 476

Safety, Exhaust Gas 74

Safety Information, Tire 333

Safety Tips 74

Satellite Radio Antenna 259

Satellite Radio (uconnect® studios) 258

Schedule, Maintenance 452

Seat Belt Reminder 46

Seat Belts 39,75

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 4 5

And Pregnant Women 48

Child Restraint 61,71

Extender 48

Front Seat 39

Inspection 75

Maintenance 433

Pretensioners 46

494INDEX

Reminder 201

Seats 83

Adjustment 83

Easy Entry 85

Fold and Tumble Rear....8 8

Head Restraints 87

Height Adjustment 84

Rear Folding....9 1

Removal....89,91

Seatback Release 85

Tilting 85

Security Against Theft....17

Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) 17

Selection of Oil 407

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) 14

Sentry Key Programming....16

Sentry Key Replacement....15

Service Assistance 473

Service Contract 475

Service Manuals 477

Setting the Clock.... 220,234,238,247

Shift Lock Manual Override 286

Shifting 285

Automatic Transmission 287

Manual Transmission 281

Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 45

Shoulder Belts 39

Side Airbag 5 5

Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,96,201,445,446

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) 350

Soft Top 131,153

Spare Tire 390

Specifications

Fuel (Gasoline) 356

Oil 407

Speed Control (Cruise Control)....102

Speedometer 200

Starting 277

INDEX 495

Automatic Transmission 277 System, Remote Starting 24
Cold Weather 278
Engine Block Heater 281 Tachometer 204
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 7 8 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 2 0 4
Manual Transmission.... 2 7 7 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint.... 6 6
Remote....24 Theft System Arming....18
Steering Theft System Disarming 18
Power 313,314 Tilt Steering Column 101
Tilt Column.... 101 Tip Start.... 278
Wheel Lock 13 Tire and Loading Information Placard 338,339
Wheel, Tilt 101 Tire Identification Number (TIN) 337
Storage....109,442 Tire Markings....333
Storage, Behind the Seat. 1 1 0 Tire Safety Information. 3 3 3
Storage, Vehicle 271,442 Tires 76,342,479
Storing Your Vehicle 4 4 2 Air Pressure 3 4 3
Sunrider 179,183 Chains 350
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag 48 Changing 389
Sway Bar Disconnect, Electronic 298 General Information 342
Swing Gate, Rear 37 High Speed 345

496INDEX

Inflation Pressures 343
Jacking 389,392
Load Capacity 338,339
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)....3 5 1
Pressure Warning Light 206
Quality Grading 479
Radial....346
Replacement 348
Rotation....350
Safety 333
Sizes 335
Spare Tire 390
Spinning 346
Tread Wear Indicators 347
To Open Hood 93
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight. 375
Torque Converter Clutch 291
Tow Hooks, Emergency 396
Towing 365,397
Disabled Vehicle 397
Guide 369
Recreational 382
Weight....369
Trac-Lok Rear Axle 295
Traction Control....3 1 9
Traction Control Light 211
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) 332
Trailer Towing 365
Cooling System Tips 382
Hitches 356,368
Minimum Requirements....37 6
Trailer and Tongue Weight....375
Wiring 380
Trailer Towing Guide 369
Trailer Weight 36 9
Transfer Case 42 6
Four-Wheel-Drive Operation 291
Maintenance....426

INDEX497

Automatic....287
Maintenance 423,426
Manual 281
Range Indicator 206
Shifting 285
(Remote Keyless Entry) 23
Transporting Pets....73
Tread Wear Indicators 347
Trip Computer 212,213
Trip Odometer 207
Trip Odometer Reset Button 206
Turn Signals 96,201,445,446
uconnect®(Hands-Free Phone) 8 2
Uniform Tire Quality Grades 479
Upholstery Care 432
Vehicle Certification Label 363
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 8
Vehicle Loading 339,363
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations 8
Vehicle Storage 271,442
Viscosity, Engine Oil 408
(Instrument Cluster Description)....200
Warnings and Cautions 8
Warranty Information 476
Washers, Windshield 412
Waxing and Polishing 429
Wheel and Wheel Trim 431
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 431
Wheel Mounting 393
Wind Buffeting 37
Window Fogging 270

Transmission

Transmitter Battery Service

Warning Lights

498INDEX

Windows....35 Fluid....412

Power....35 Windshield Wiper Blades....412

Windshield Defroster....76 Windshield Wipers....98

Windshield, Folding....186 Wiper, Rear....192

Windshield Washers....98,412

INSTALLATIONOFRADIOTRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT

Specialdesignconsiderationsareincorporatedinto this vehicle'selectronicsystemtoprovideimmunitytoradio frequencysignals.Mobiletwo-wayradiosandtelephone equipmentmustbeinstalledproperlybytrainedpersonnel.Thefollowingmustbeobservedduringinstallation.

The positive power connections should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. Then negative power connections should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused.

Antennasfortwo-wayradiosshouldbemountedonthe roofotherearareaofthevehicle.Careshouldbeused inmountingantennaswithmagnetbases.Magnetsmay affecttheaccuracyoroperationofthecompasson vehiclessoequipped.

Theantennacableshouldbeasshortaspracticaland routedawayfromthevehiclewiringwhenpossible.Use onlyfullyshieldedcoaxialcable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable totheradioto ensure alow Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobileradioequipmentwithoutoutputpowergreaterthan normalmayrequirespecialprecautions.

Allinstallationsshouldbecheckedforpossibleinterferencebetweenthecommunicationsequipmentandthe vehicle'selectronicsystems.

Chrysler LLC 81-326-0955-R1

3rd Edition

Printed in U.S.A.